CMS Hardware en

CMS Mud Logging Unit
1 1 Overview of CMS Mud Logging Unit
2 2 CMS Positive Pressure Explosion-proof and Heavy

Current System
3 3 CAN Field Bus
4 4 Installation and Operation of Instrument
5 5 Operation Guide for Gas Survey
6 Startup Operation and Test of the Complete Machine

6
7 CMS Installation and Configuration Manual
7
8 Manual of CMS Software
8
9 Manual of CMS Background Software
9
10 Geologic Evaluation Instruments
10
July 2008
Safety guideline
The manual includes precautions that should be followed to ensure personnel safety and prevent products and
connected devices from being damaged.
For these precautions, symbols are used for alarm purpose and the following descriptions will be given
depending on severity:
Danger
It indicates that without proper preventive measures, death, serious physical injury or major property loss will occur.
Warning
It indicates that without proper preventive measures, death, serious physical injury or major property loss will
possibly occur.
Caution
It indicates that without proper preventive measures, slight physical injury will possibly occur.
Caution
It indicates that without proper preventive measures, property loss will possibly occur.
Attention:
Arouse your attention to important information on products and to specific parts of products or files.
Qualified personnel
Only qualified personnel are allowed to install and operate the device. Qualified personnel refer to those who, with
experience in field mud logging, can install, test run and operate devices according to established safety
practices and standards.
Correct operation
Precautions:
Warning
The device and its components can only be used for description of product catalog or technical specification and can
only be connected to facilities or components recognized or recommended by Shenkai Company.
The device can function correctly and safely only when transported, stored, assembled, installed correctly and run
and maintained as recommended.
Trade mark
, , and are registered trade marks of Shenkai Company.
Any use of other names related to the trade marks herein by any third party for its own purpose will infringe interest
of the trade mark owner.
Copyright 2008 Shenkai Company, All rights reserved.
Without the express written permission, it is forbidden to copy, transmit or use this manual or part of it.
Any violation of the above will be disciplined. All rights, including patent rights, utility model or appearance design
patent rights, are reserved.
Shanghai Shenkai Petroleum Science and Technology Co., Ltd. hereby declares that contents of this manual are verified
and compliant with the said hardware and software. Mistakes, however, are unavoidable, so complete consistence cant
be guaranteed. Contents of this manual are subject to periodic review and will be modified in the next version. Your
opinions on improvement are welcome.
Copyright 2008 Shenkai Company. The information in this manual is subject to change without notice.
Shanghai SK Petroleum & Chemical Equipment Corporation Ltd.

Shanghai Shenkai Petroleum Science and Technology Co., Ltd.
Technical Support Department
Customer service hotline: +86(21)64290467 Fax: +86(21)34030004

Website: www.shenkai.com Zip code: 201114
Purpose of this manual
This manual gives a general description of SK-CMS bus-type mud logging unit to facilitate
installation and debugging of the system and describes options and components needed to
connect to other devices.
Manual scope
The manual is applicable to the following systems:
Device model Software version Operating system
CMS data acquisition

Windows 2000 Server
SK-CMS software
/Windows 2000 Professional SP4
CMS background software
The manual describes the templates valid when it is published. For new models or the latest
models, we reserve the rights to add product information list, including the current
information of the related templates.
Reader and knowledge requirements

The manual is intended for use by those who exhibit practices on field mud logging and
are qualified to debug and operate hardware mentioned herein
Acquaintance with computers using Windows 2000 OS is also needed.
Information package
In addition to the user manual, an information package is also provided, including:
Instruction manual and drivers disk of industrial computer.
Software for SK-CMS mud logging unit and drivers disk for hardware.
Certificate of conformity and explosion-proof certificate for the device and debugging
record of part of matching components.
Instruction manuals for some outsourced sensors (such as hydrogen sulfide sensor).
The specific information package depends on the specific configuration requirements.
Guideline
The manual adopts the following organization method to help you find the target information
quickly and conveniently:
General table of contents at the beginning of the manual.
Recover and discard

Please contact professional companies to help deal with electric wastes so as to avoid
environment pollution incurred in the course of recovering and discarding equipment.
Training
Shenkai Company also provides a number of training courses introducing SK-CMS series
mud logging units. For details, please contact Shenkai branch company in your location or
Technical Support Department in Shanghai headquarters.
Other support
For any technical issues, please contact Technical Support Department in Shanghai
headquarters or local after-sales service center.
Online services and technical support

In addition to the information package provided with the equipment, the following data are
available online:
http: //www.shenkai.com
On the website, you can find:
New product information constantly updated.
Answers to common questions.
Links to product manuals and drivers.
Technical communications between users and experts.
Shenkai customer support hotline:

Daqi
ng
Urumchi
Panjin
Wushen
Jido
Luntai Korla county ng
Dongying
Baoji Xian
Dazhou Shanghai
Chengdu
Shanghai (headquarters) Shanghai (Foreign Trade

Sales and technical support Company)
Service time: Monday-Friday Sales (domestic)
8: 3017: 00 Service time: Monday-Friday
Tel: +86 )21) 64292704 (domestic sales) 8: 3017: 00
+86 (21) 64290467 (technical support) Tel: +86 (21) 64293625
Fax: +86 (21) 34030004 Fax: +86 (21) 64298688
E-Mail: skkj@shenkai.com E-Mail: trade@shenkai.com
Korla (Korla Branch Company) Urumchi (Northwest Branch Chengdu (Southwest Branch
Sales, Mud Logging and Technical Company) Company)
Support Sales and technical support Sales and technical support
Service time: all year round Service time: Monday-Friday Service time: Monday-Friday
10: 00-14: 00, 16: 00-20:00 9: 3018: 00 8: 30-12: 00, 12: 30-17:00
Tel: +86 (996) 2293131 Tel: +86 (991) 6659909 Tel: +86 (28) 86012176
Fax: +86 (996) 2293132 Fax: +86 (991) 6659909 Fax: +86 (28) 86012176
E-Mail: shenkaikrl@163.com E-Mail: E-Mail: shenkai-
shenkaixbb@163.com cd@tom.com
Luntai (office) Dazhou (office) Jidong (office)
Technical Support Sales and technical support Sales and technical support
Service time: Monday-Friday Service time: Monday-Friday Service time: Monday-Friday
10: 00-14: 00, 16: 00-20:00 8: 30-12: 00, 12: 30-17:00 8: 00-12: 00, 14: 00-18:00
Tel: +86 (996) 4698776 Tel: +86 (818) 2633301 Tel: +86 (315) 8756696
Fax: +86 (996) 4698776 Fax: +86 (818) 2633301 Fax: +86 (315) 8756696
Wushen County (office)

Sales and technical support
Service time: Monday-Friday
10: 00-14: 00, 16: 00-20:00
Tel: +86 (477) 7213036
Fax: +86 (477) 7213036
Note: Urumchi (Northwest Branch Company), Chengdu (Southwest Branch Company), Korla (Korla Branch Company),
Luntai (office), Dazhou (office), Jidong (office) and Wushen County (office) are resident offices of Shenkai in China
in addition to Shanghai Headquarters. Besides, Shenkai also establishes offices in Panjin, Dongying, Xian, Baoji and
Daqing, launching sales service and technical support on an irregular basis.
Hardware Manual of CMS Mud Logging Unit
Contents
Hardware Manual of CMS Mud Logging Unit......................................................................1

Chapter 1 Overview of CMS Mud Logging Unit......................................................................1
1. Preface................................................................................................................................................1
2. Main technical indicators....................................................................................................................1
2.1. Power device..............................................................................................................................1
2.2. Total hydrocarbon detector and component detector of natural gas..........................................2
2.3. Sensor.........................................................................................................................................2
2.4. Geological instrument................................................................................................................2
2.5. Main technical indicators of engine degasser............................................................................3
2.6. Logging room of CMS mud logging unit...................................................................................3
3. Design and Structure of SK-CMS......................................................................................................4
3.1 Components................................................................................................................................4
3.2 Connection.................................................................................................................................4
3.3 Measurement parameters............................................................................................................5
Chapter II CMS Positive Pressure Explosion-proof and Heavy Current System...................8
1. Positive pressure explosion-proof system..........................................................................................8
1.1 Overview....................................................................................................................................8
1.2 System control program chart....................................................................................................8
1.3 Indicators of the positive pressure explosion-proof system.......................................................9
1.4 Power source system connection..............................................................................................11
1.5 Operation of the positive pressure system................................................................................12
1.6 Fire damper..............................................................................................................................15
1.7 Maintenance of the positive pressure system...........................................................................16
2. Power supply and supply control system of mud logging unit.........................................................16
2.1 Flow of power supply control system......................................................................................16
2.2 Flow of branch circuits of power distribution part...................................................................16
2.3 Circuit principle of the control loop.........................................................................................16
3. UPS manual......................................................................................................................................20
3.1 Introduction..............................................................................................................................20
3.2 Installation................................................................................................................................20
3.3 Startup and running..................................................................................................................20
3.4 Maintenance.............................................................................................................................21
3.5 Common trouble diagnosis and elimination.............................................................................22
4. Circuit failure diagnosis and elimination of explosion-proof control box and distribution box......22
4.1 Fail to start up the distribution box..........................................................................................22
4.2 Degasser cannot start up...........................................................................................................22
4.3 Degasser stops running and gives alarm..................................................................................22
4.4 Protector tripping due to electric leakage of distribution box..................................................23
4.5 Cheep of distribution box in the logging room........................................................................23
Chapter III CAN Field Bus.......................................................................................................24
1. Overview..........................................................................................................................................24
2. Characteristics and functions of SK-9N21/11 CAN bus explosion-proof acquisition interface......25
3. Working environments of SK-9N21/11 CAN bus explosion-proof acquisition interface................27
4. Installation steps, methods and precautions of SK-9N21/11CAN bus explosion-proof acquisition
interface.....................................................................................................................................................27
5. Structure diagram.............................................................................................................................28
6. Technical parameters........................................................................................................................29
7. Wiring...............................................................................................................................................31
8. Product model naming and variety features.....................................................................................32
9. CAN adapter card and bus power.....................................................................................................33
Remarks (For the old nodes of CAN bus)................................................................................36
1. Classification of CAN bus sensors...................................................................................................36
2. Explanation to use of CAN bus node...............................................................................................38
2.1 Major purpose and scope of application..................................................................................38
2.2 Parameters................................................................................................................................38
2.3 Operating principle and main structure of product..................................................................39
2.4 Wiring diagram of CAN bus node...........................................................................................41
2.5 Installation and debugging.......................................................................................................42
2.6 Maintenance.............................................................................................................................42
2.7 Common troubles and elimination methods.............................................................................42
3. Schematic diagram of connecting field bus......................................................................................43
4. Key points to field use of CAN bus sensor system..........................................................................44
4.1 Problem about communication stability...................................................................................44
4.2 Protection class of bus connector.............................................................................................45
4.3 Problem about fuse of CAN node............................................................................................45
Chapter IV Installation and Operation of Instrument...........................................................46
1. Installation and arrangement of logging unit....................................................................................46
2. Connection and installation of power supply and distribution system.............................................48
3. Introduction and installation of the sensor.......................................................................................48
3.1 Sk-8J06 explosion-proof drawworks sensor............................................................................48
3.2 SK-8B06F pump stroke/table speed sensors............................................................................51
3.3 SK-8Y21A hook weight pressure sensor.................................................................................55
3.4 SK-8Y3XA series pressure sensor (stand pipe pressure and casing pressure).........................58
3.5 SK-8N07G AC&DC electric torque sensor.............................................................................62
3.6 SK-8N01G rotary table torque sensor......................................................................................63
3.7 SK-8N05G terminal strand type rotary table torque sensor.....................................................68
3.8 SK-8N02 stretching pulley type rotary table torque sensor.....................................................71
3.9 SK-8C05/8C05L ultrasonic liquid-level sensor.......................................................................74
3.10 SK-8C06G liquid level sensor..................................................................................................85
3.11 SK-8D08 (digital type) electrical conductivity sensor.............................................................87
3.12 SK-8D03/8D04 electrical conductivity sensor.........................................................................94
3.13 SK-8M04 density sensor..........................................................................................................98
3.14 SK-8W01A drilling fluid temperature sensor........................................................................101
3.15 SK-8L03A mud outlet flow sensor.........................................................................................103
3.16 H2S detection device..............................................................................................................106
3.17 Connection method of top-drive torque and top-drive rotation speed...................................107
4. Installation and connection of CAN bus and explosion-proof isolation barrier.............................109
5. Degasser..........................................................................................................................................113
5.1 SK-7T05 engine degasser.......................................................................................................113
5.2 SK-7T03 pontoon engine degasser........................................................................................123
5.3 SK-9F01 Sample Gas Blowback Device...............................................................................130
6. Surveillance and Communication Equipment................................................................................134
6.1 SK-4S02 Video Camera.........................................................................................................134
6.2 SK-4X03 Multi-function Display...........................................................................................144
6.3 Installation of Program-control Telephone.............................................................................149
6.4 Installation of External Display..............................................................................................150
Chapter V Operation Guide for Gas Survey.........................................................................151
1. Auxiliary equipment for gas survey...............................................................................................151
1.1. SK-9Q400Z hydrogen generator............................................................................................151
1.2. SK-9K06-II oilless silenced air compressor...........................................................................155
1.3. SK-7R02 thermovacuum distilling degasser..........................................................................157
2. Equipment for gas survey...............................................................................................................161
2.1 Operation of SK-3Q04 hydrogen flame chromatograph........................................................161
Operations of SK-3H02 infrared analyzer..........................................................................................207
Chapter VI Startup Operation and Test of the Complete Machine.....................................212
Geologic Evaluation Instruments...........................................................................................217
Chapter I SK-2T03 Carbonate Analyzer...............................................................................217
1. Operating principle.........................................................................................................................217
2. Main technical indicators................................................................................................................217
3. Introduction to components of the instrument................................................................................217
4. Use and operation of reaction tank.................................................................................................218
5. Use and operation of software........................................................................................................220
6. Maintenance....................................................................................................................................222
7. Data interpretation..........................................................................................................................222
Chapter SK-2N01G Mudstone Density Meter....................................................................224
1. Principle..........................................................................................................................................224
2. Composition and technical indicators of instrument......................................................................224
3. Operation and use...........................................................................................................................224
4. Data Interpretation..........................................................................................................................225
Chapter III SK-2Y01G-I Fluorescence Analyzer..................................................................228
1. Principle..........................................................................................................................................228
2. Main technical indicators................................................................................................................228
3. Use and operation...........................................................................................................................228
BUKU PETUNJUK PERANGKAT KERAS CMS

BAB I PANDANGAN UMUM CMS
I PENDAHULUAN
CMS (Creative Mudlogging System) mud logging unit is a new generation of petroleum
exploration development equipment that is developed successfully by absorbing foreign advanced
technology, on the basis of professional technology accumulated for many years and depending on the
talent advantages of company and abundant industrial base in Shanghai; the instrument is in the leading
position at home regarding the overall design and manufacturing technology and reaches the advanced
level in the world.
CMS mud logging unit is a high- and new-technology product comprehensively using various
parameters of mechanical and electronic integration, gas analysis, geologic analysis, computer
technology and so on. CMS introduces the concept of difference chromatography and is equipped with
powerful 3Q04 quick chromatograph to solve the problem that on-site high-concentration fluorescent
display disappears suddenly; it is equipped with various data processing functions such as a 2D
quantitative fluorescent instrument with high sensitivity, a geochemical instrument meeting on-site
requirements, PK nuclear magnetic resonance apparatus, high-stability and advanced sensor, advanced
and proven CAN bus signal processing & transmission system, brand-new software with powerful
functions, stable and reliable hot backup and so on.
In order to accommodate to the on-site power supply for drilling and in the need of protecting
peripheral devices, the CMS mud logging unit provides a set of full strong electricity distribution
system and ensures the stable and reliable operation of instrument under the execrable power supply
conditions in the filed. 1. It has flexible input voltage selection and is equipped with 25KV.A isolation
transformer, meeting the input requirements of 220V/380/440V/480V power supply. 2. It has engine
degasser end phase over-current protection and is equipped with over-current phase-broken protector. 3.
In order to enable the software and hardware operate normally, it is equipped with two 3.75KV. A
uninterrupted power supplies (UPS). 4. Over-current and short protection of the whole machine.
- Input voltase 220V/380V/440V/480V power supply

- Mesin gas trap terproteksi dari kerusakan
- Didukung software dan hardware
- Perlindungan dari semua mesin
-
II Main technical indicators (Indikator utama teknikal)
II.1 Power device
a. Insolating transformer
Input voltage: 380V (480V, 440V, 220V optional)
Input frequency: 50Hz
Output voltage: 380V 5%
Output frequency: 50Hz
UPS
Input voltage: 220V 10%
Input frequency: 35-65Hz
Output voltage: 220V 2%
Output frequency: 50 1Hz
Waveform distortion: 5%
Continuous power-on time: 15min
Output power: 2250W
1
Safety indicator of instrument room: the insulation resistance between the phase wire and earth lead of
machine room is more than 2 Mhe instrument shall be equipped with a good earthing device.
II.2 Total hydrocarbon detector and component detector of natural gas
Main technical indicators of 3Q04 hydrogen flame chromatograph
Measuring contents: C1, C2, C3, iC4, nC4, iC5, nC5;
Analysis cycle: 30s or 90s;
Component measuring range of natural gas:
-6
5x10 -1mol/mol (the analysis cycle of CH4 is 30s.);
30x10 -6 -1mol/mol (the analysis cycle of CH4 is 90s);
-6
The minimum detection concentration: 5x10 -1mol/mol (CH4);
-6
The total hydrocarbon measuring range of natural gas: 20x10 -1mol/mol;
Repeatability error: 2.5;
Baseline drift: 2%hF.S;
Noise: 1%F.S;
Concentration ratio of methane and ethane is 100:1 (10% methane and 0.1% ethane):
evidently distinguishable;
CO2 infrared detector
Measuring range: 0.2-100%;
Measuring accuracy: 2.5% (F.S);
II.3 Sensor
Pump stroke sensor (RPM)
Measuring range: 30, 60, 120, 240, 480, 960, 1920 times/min optional Accuracy: 1% (F.S)
Table speed sensor
Measuring range: 30, 60, 120, 240, 480, 960, 1920 times/min optional Accuracy: 1% (F.S)
Rotary table torque sensor (TORQUE)
Measuring range: 0-1.6MPa(0-50KN.m) Accuracy: 2% (F.S)
Stand pipe and casing pressure sensor (SPP)
Measuring range: 0-40MPa, 0-60MPa Accuracy: 2% (F.S)
Hook weight parameter sensor (HOOKLOAD)
Measuring range: 0-6MPa (0-4000KN) Accuracy: 2% (F.S)
Drilling fluid temperature sensor (MTI)
Measuring range: 0-100 Accuracy: 1 F.S
Drilling fluid density sensor (MWO)
Measuring range: 0-2.5g/cm 3 Accuracy: 1% (F.S)
Drilling fluid conductivity sensor (PIT)
Measuring range: 0-50ms/cm,0 -300ms/cm Accuracy: 2% (F.S)
Drilling fluid outlet flow sensor ((MFO)
Measuring range: 0-100% (relative flow) Accuracy: 5% (F.S)
Volume sensor of drilling fluid tank (PIT)
Measuring range: 0-2m (or specified according to users requirements) Accuracy: 1.5% (F.S)
Drawworks sensor
Measuring range: 0-9999 (hook position) Accuracy: 10mm/single
II.4 Geological instrument
Carbonate analyzer
Measuring range: 0-100 carbonate
Accuracy: 1
2
Mudstone density meter

3
Measuring range: 1-3g/cm
The minimum sample weight: 0.05g
Resolution: 0.03g/cm 3
Fluor tester
Electric power supply: 220VAC, 50Hz
Power: 40W
Specs of fluorescent tube: 20W ultraviolet fluorescent tube (two tubes, specially
manufactured)
Hot vacuum distillation degasser
Electric power supply: 220VAC, 50Hz
Heating power: 300W
Degree of vacuum of system: 1.3KPa
Leakproofness of system: after the degree of vacuum reaches 1.3KPa, cut off the atmos valve
for 2h and observe by eyes the vacuum gauge drops to not more than 0.26KPa.
Volume of mud bottle: 250ml
II.5 Main technical indicators of engine degasser
Working voltage: three-phase 380VAC
Power: 370W
Rotation speed: 140rpm
Anti-hazard classification: ExdIIBT4
II.6 Logging room of CMS mud logging unit
The logging room of CMS mud logging unit is a kind of positive pressurized logging room. Its
shell is the skid composed of container made of corrugated steel.
The technical requirements are as follows:
The mud logging unit room is constructed and accepted according to GB1413-85 and GB3219-82.
The error of diagonal line at the bottom, at the top and on two sides of the room is not more than
10mm and that at two ends is not more than 6mm.
The error of diagonal line of the skid is not more than 10mm.
For the corrugated plate on the container wall, 862 cold rolling plate is adopted.
There shall be no slag inclusion, air holes, burn-off, molten slag left and spatter in all the welding
seams.
The weather tightness test shall be conducted on the container body according to GB3219-82, the
internal and external painting spray treatment shall be conducted after welding the container body,
then a layer of epoxy zinc rich primer is placed (the thickness of membrane is 15m), The
chlorinated rubber primer with the membrane thickness of 20-50m is placed on the external
surface and the part of external surface 660m from the ground is painted with the lacquer into blue.
The built-in fire and explosion prevention classification is class-III.
The thickness of steel plate on the shell of explosion protection logging room is 4mm (the
thickness of steel plate on the shell of non explosion protection logging room is 2mm).
The built-in surface and joint shall be flat, the beautiful and color separation and the height of
closet shall be made into the raised floor according to the pre-buried trunking of the cabinet of
built-in structure.
All furniture should be firmly fixed and suitable for the field.
External dimensions and weights of CMS mud logging unit: length (8.0m) width (2.44m)
height (2.79m) (with the length of the skid 8.5m), the net weight is about 13.5t (the net weight
of non explosion protection logging unit about 9t). The external dimensions of CMS mud logging
unit are generally uniform without special requirements.
3
Internal arrangement of CMS mud logging unit: the internal arrangement of CMS mud logging unit
mainly includes four parts: external power and cable inlet room, major machine cabinet room,
computer and printer working section and geologic working section.
III Design and Structure of SK-CMS

III.1 Components
Explosion-proof sensors, including sensors of 4-20mA signal analog, pump strokes and
drawworks encoder.
Explosion-proof CAN bus digital acquisition devices, including CAN bus explosion proof
isolation barrier (various modules are available such as SK-9N0X, SK-9N05-X, SK-
9N21/11), CAN bus shield cable, T type CAN three-way (only applicable to SK-9N0X) and
CAN acquisition adapter card;
Computer system, including MAIN-SERVER, SUB-SERVER, MAIN-DAQ and SUB-DAQ.
Software system: CMS data acquisition software, CMS data processing software (based on
Windows2000 platform);
Hydrogen flame chromatograph analyzer: SK-3Q04 quick chromatograph;
Non-hydrocarbon analyzer: SK-3H02 infrared analyzer;
Sample pretreater: SK-9G01 or SK-9G02;
Auxiliary unit: SK-3F02, including concentrator, video distributor, 24V/4A DC switching
power supply and CAN bus interface;
Hydrogen generator: SK-9Q400Z;
Air compressor: SK-9K06-II;
Long chart printer: EPSON DLQ-3500K;
Carbonate analyzer: SK-2T03;
Hot vacuum degasser: SK-7R02;
Engine degasser: SK-7T05, SK-7T03;
UPS: two SK-9U03 (3.75KVA);
Strong electricity distribution system, including flameproof transformer and strong electricity
distribution control box;
Positive pressure explosion-proof system, including flameproof control box, detector of
indoor smoke, gas pressure, flammable gas and hydrogen sulfide, blower and fire damper and
so on;
Other auxiliary devices, including remote explosion-proof terminal, geological instrument,
single refrigerated desert air-conditioner, unit heater, printer, oven, refrigerator, water tank
and furniture and so on, which can be equipped according to users requirements.
III.2 Connection
Connection methods of main devices of Shenkai standard instruments are listed as follows:
Collector and server are networked through concentrator.
CAN acquisition adapter card is installed in the collector. CAN bus signal is connected into
acquisition adapter card NO.0 interface (for details, see the instructions of CAN acquisition
adapter card)
SK-3Q04 quick hydrogen flame chromatograph analyzer is equipped and networked with
collector through concentrator. If communication is impossible due to network failure, you
can also use RS232 serial line to connect directly to the extra interface of collector, and
modify SK-3Q04 communication protocol (for details, see the using method of quick
hydrogen flame chromatograph analyzer).
SK-3H02 infrared analyzer, if configured, should be connected to COM2 of collector through
RS232 serial line.
4
Long chart printer is connected to the parallel port of collector through data cables.
Carbonate analyzer, as a 4-20mA signal analog sensor, is connected to CAN bus.
The sample gas collected by engine degasser is transported to SK-9G01sample pretreater
through non-adsorption pipeline, then sent to hydrogen flame chromatograph analyzer and
non-hydrocarbon analyzer respectively (for details, see chromatography section).
III.3 Measurement parameters
SK-CMS mud logging unit can mainly acquire or calculate the drilling parameters as follows.
Engineering parameters: well depth, bit position, lag well depth, drilling time, hook height,
weight, bit weight, number of pump strokes, rotary table torque, standpipe pressure, casing
pressure and table speed, etc. .
Gas-measuring parameters: hydrocarbon components: C1, C2, C3, iC4, nC4, iC5, nC5;
Non-hydrocarbon: CO2;
Drilling fluid parameters: inlet and outlet temperature, inlet and outlet conductivity, inlet and
outlet density, volume of branch tank and head tank, outlet flow;
Security detection parameters: flammable gas and hydrogen sulfide;
Geologic analysis parameters: mudstone density, content of carbonate, flow analysis;
Positive pressure explosion-proof detection parameters: indoor smoke, gas pressure,
flammable gas and hydrogen sulfide;
Attachment: Block diagram of CMS system
5
CAN
adapter MAIN-DAQ
Explosion-proof CAN sensor card
Net-
Multi-serial port work
Carbonate analyzer card Card
CAN
adapter SUB-DAQ Net-
card work
Card
HUB
Multi-serial port
card
Outlet Chromatography Real time engineering
long chart printing
Inlet Chromatography
CO2 analyzer Real time chromatography

Net- long chart printing
work
Card
MAIN-SERVER Portable backup PC
Well logging printing
Geochemical instrument
Quantitative fluorescent Net- Real-time Data printing

instrument SUB-SERVER work
Card Video display device
P.K analyzer Multi-serial port
card
Long-distance transmission
Others
Attachment: External and internal diagrammatic drawings of CMS
6
7
Chapter II CMS Positive Pressure Explosion-proof and Heavy

Current System
IV Positive pressure explosion-proof system
IV.1 Overview
For application in different conditions, the instrument room is equipped with positive pressure
explosion-proof system, making it applicable to Zone 1 dangerous places. Inside the room there are
detectors of pressure, flammable gas, smoke and hydrogen sulfide. In the case of any abnormal situation,
acoustic and optical alarms will be given and power source will be cut.
IV.2 System control program chart
Figure 2-1 Control program chart of the explosion-proof system
8
Figure 2-2 Power source chart of the explosion-proof system

IV.3 Indicators of the positive pressure explosion-proof system
The instrument room adopts positive pressure explosion-proof method, complies with IEC79-13
and can be used in Zone 1 dangerous places.
Room shell is up to A0 level fire rating and can operate in the designated areas in offshore
platforms.
Air exchange time: 15-20min.
9
Normal operating pressure: 60-200Pa.

Alarm threshold of flammable gas: 25%LEL.
Threshold of smoke alarm: light reduction rate 12.5% per meter.
Threshold of H2S alarm: 10PPM.
Figure 2-3 Schematic diagram of control circuit of explosion-proof box
10
IV.4 Power source system connection

Connect an external power source of 380V/50HZ with three phases and four lines (three phase live
lines and null line) for an onshore wellsite; connect an external power source with three phases and
three lines (three phase live lines and no null line) for an offshore platform. In order to ensure the
normal operation of device, the external power source should power the instrument room directly and
no other power consumers are allowed to be connected in serials in the circuit.
First, turn the universal selection switch on the panel of flameproof control box to position 0 (stop).
Close the explosion-proof air switch of the primary power and the three-phase power indicator lights up.
If the explosion-proof lamp in the doorway is switched on, then it will also light up.
Figure 2-4 100m power cable in the back cabin of the mud logging unit
Warning
Identification of primary power cable No. in the instrument room: 1,2 and 3: live line; 4: null
line.
To use the equipment in countries or regions outside China, please first make clear voltage of
the three-phase power source outputted by wellsite generators. The flameproof transformer
equipped can connect 4 three-phase power sources of 220V/380V/440V/480V at one time. The
second output power source is of three phase 380V. Adjustment is needed inside the
instrument while selecting the first input power source. For details, please refer to Selection
of three-phase input power source. The wellsite three-phase power source can be connected
only after the input power source is set correctly. The secondary load will run abnormally or
even burn down if the input power source is not selected correctly.
Selection of three-phase input power source

Inside the CMS mud logging unit, open the junction box (Figure 2-5) at the top of the
flameproof transformer and connect the three-phase live lines of the input terminal to the
connector corresponding to the external input three-phase voltage (Figure 2-6).
Open top cover of junction
box here
Figure 2-5 Appearance schematic diagram of flameproof transformer
11
Arrester
Power input options:

Fuse 220V, 380V, 440V and 480V
380V power
output
Figure 2-6 Junction box schematic diagram of flameproof transformer

Danger
Before power on, please ensure that the main switch of power supply to the mud logging unit
and all internal power consumers are off. Serious physical injury or even death and equipment
damage is likely to occur if attempting to mount or dismount the mud logging unit and
internal power consumers with power on, which will result in electric shock or accidental
operation of equipment.
IV.5 Operation of the positive pressure system

Preparations before startup
First power off all loads inside distribution cabinet and the mud logging unit and switch off the
main loop air switch (C45AD) + leakage protector (VIgIC45).
Open the airway port cover plate (Figure 2-7) on the side of the instrument room, connect a 30m
airway pipe and place the other end of the pipe in a safe area. Place the pipe at the top of the mud
logging unit if there is no safe area within 30m.
12
Airway
port
Airway
pipe
Figure 2-7 Sketch map of airway port-pipe connection of SK-CMS

Warning
Before connecting the airway pipe, please check it carefully for damage. The damaged airway
pipe must be replaced. Otherwise, the blower will suck air from dangerous areas to the mud
logging unit.
Activate positive pressure explosion protection

Close all ports of the mud logging unit and turn the universal selection switch on the panel of
flameproof control box to position 1 (auto). Now, the positive blower begins to run and the positive
pressure explosion-proof system is activated. The positive pressure explosion-proof detection indicator
above the cabinet displays auto (in Figure 2-8, the row of red lamps light up). The blower runs to send
fresh air to the instrument room, so the pressure is increasing gradually. When the pressure reaches the
set value (60-200Pa), the instrument room begins to exchange air for 20 minutes. After completion of
air exchange, the primary power will output 380V three-phase AC power to the secondary power supply
distribution box if output signals of flammable gas, smoke, H2S and micro differential pressure sensors
are within the normal range.
Figure 2-8 Sketch map of positive pressure explosion-proof signal indicators inside the instrument
room
Observe carefully readings of the barometer above the

cabinet (Figure 2-9). In the case of good air tightness of cabinet
door and correct running direction of blower, the mud logging
unit should be able to build +60Pa pressure within several
seconds.
Failure to build +60Pa pressure for a long period is usually
Figure 2-9 Sketch map of barometer inside
due to the following: SK-CMS
Break off or damage of sealing strip of the cabinet door, needing immediate replacement.
13
Wrong running direction of blowers three-phase AC motor, needing change in power phase. There
are two ways to change the power phase:
Change positions of any two live lines in the input terminal of the primary power.
Change positions of any two live lines in the blower (Figure 2-10).
First switch off the primary power
of the mud logging unit and open
top cover of the power supply
junction box of the blower
Change positions of any two

live lines in the three-phase
power lines of U, V and W.
Figure 2-10 Sketch map of changing phases of the three-phase power supply to SK-CMS
blower
Operating procedures of the positive pressure explosion-proof system:

The automatic control signal indicator lights up and the blower begins to run to feed fresh air into
the instrument room. The normal status indicators of all sensors (red lamp) light up. In the case of any
abnormality, acoustic and optical alarms will be given, in which, acoustic alarm refers to the long
ringing of the ringer inside the cabinet, while optical alarm refers to that for the positive pressure
explosion-proof signal indicators corresponding to the abnormal parameter, the red lamp is off, while
the green lamp is flashing.
Abnormality in the course of first/secondary power supply:
In the case of abnormality of one or more of flammable gas, smoke, H 2S and micro
differential pressure, the corresponding acoustic and optical alarms will be given until the
situation becomes normal and alarm stop, but the 20min air exchange timing will not be
affected. If the abnormality continues until end of the 20min air exchange, the secondary
power supply will not be obtained until the situation becomes normal and alarm stop.
In the case of abnormality of micro differential pressure, the corresponding indicator will
flash until the situation becomes normal and alarm stops. If pressure buildup fails within
10s, acoustic and optical alarms will be given until the situation becomes normal and alarm
stop. If the situation lasts a further 10s, the secondary power supply will be cut off, the
20min air exchange restarted and the timing reset until timing restarts after the micro
differential pressure becomes normal and alarm stop.
In the case of abnormal smoke concentration, the acoustic and optical alarms will be given
and the secondary power supply will fail. Alarm will continue unit manual switch off of
the flameproof control box. Reactivate the positive pressure explosion-proof system after
smoke is exhausted completely and restart air exchange.
Abnormality in the course of normal operation after secondary power supply
In the case of abnormality of one or more of flammable gas and H 2S, the corresponding
acoustic and optical alarms will be given and the secondary power supply will be cut off
until the situation becomes normal and alarm stop.
In the case of abnormal smoke concentration, the corresponding acoustic and optical
alarms will be given and the secondary power supply will be cut off until manual switch off
of the flameproof control box. Reactivate the positive pressure explosion-proof system
14
after smoke is exhausted completely and restart air exchange.

Positive pressure bypass control.
Turn the universal selection switch on the panel of flameproof control box to position 2 (manual).
The system powers directly the secondary power supply system. After the positive pressure bypass
control is activated, none of the positive pressure, flammable gas and smoke alarm systems operates.
Warning
Use of positive pressure bypass control is prohibited unless it is sure that the instrument room is
in a safe environment.
Use of UPS is prohibited when the instrument room is in a dangerous place, otherwise, danger is
likely to occur.
IV.6 Fire damper
Figure 2-11 Sketch map of fire damper

The instrument room shell is up to A0 level fire rating and fire damper is placed at the exhaust port
of the instrument room. Function of the fire damper is to prevent flame or smoke from entering the
instrument room through the exhaust port in the case of fire hazard. The fire damper should be closed in
the case of fire hazard.
The fire damper of the instrument room is located inside the upper cabinet, with a marker on the
cabinet door. In the case of fire hazard, personnel inside the instrument room should close the fire
damper. Method to close the fire damper: turn handle of the fire damper upward to the vertical position.
If it is impossible to enter the instrument room, smash glass of the pull box on the left end of the
instrument room and pull with force the pull wire inside the box for emergency close of the fire damper.
Pressure inside the room is usually 60-200Pa (reading of the micro differential pressure indicator is
25-83.3%). An excessively low pressure will make system activation impossible, while an excessively
high pressure will make personnel inside the room feel uncomfortable. Pressure inside the room can be
changed by adjusting the opening of the fire damper in the geological zone inside the room. Refer to
Figure 2-11 for adjusting method.
IV.7 Maintenance of the positive pressure system
To ensure long-term normal operation of the positive pressure system, all devices should be
checked once every three months at least. Device checkup covers: running of centrifugal blower,
pressure of the instrument room, switch of fire damper, calibration of flammable gas detector and
operation of smoke detector.
15
If room pressure is not up to the set 60-200Pa, first check that whether door and emergency rescue
door are closed completely and whether cable guiding section is sealed; then check whether air line is
smooth and whether the opening of the fire damper is too large. For calibration of the flammable gas
detector, refer to the related instruction manual.
V Power supply and supply control system of mud logging unit

The input voltage supply is three-phase & four-wire and the instrument can run normally under the
conditions of three phase alternating current supply input with the voltage of 480V/440V/380V/220V(
30%) and the frequency of 50Hz.
V.1 Flow of power supply control system
The primary power of distribution box works after the three-phase & four-wire (A, B, C, N) or
three-phase & three-wire (A, B, C) power supply of external power enters the distribution box of the
logging room and is connected to the leakage protector (VIgIC45) and the air switch (C45AD) of the
main loop is connected to the isolation transformer of main fuse (FU30A/3). The flow of power supply
is: air switch of main loop (C45AD) + leakage protector (VIgIC45) main fuse (FU30A/3) main
contactor (C1) current transformer (MA, MB, MC).
V.2 Flow of branch circuits of power distribution part

(1) Circuit: AC220V is led from the phase wire and neutral wire before the main fuse to the air switch
C45N and fuse of the illuminating system.
(2) Circuit: A, B, C phase wires are led after the main fuse to the indicator of three-phase supply;
different phase voltages and phase currents are selected and set by the universal change-over switch
and are displayed by three-phase voltmeter, current meter and frequency meter.
(3) Circuit: three phase wires are led from the middle of three current transformers to the instrument
and air switches of 15 power distributions for other power consumers.
(4) Circuit: three-phase 380VAC power supply is led from three phase wires (A, B, C) of main circuit
to the air switch (C45N/3) of degasser;
Degasser current flow: air switch (C45N/3) contactor (CZ) thermal relay (RJ) degasser.
V.3 Circuit principle of the control loop

(1) Main circuit control
Switch in the air switch (C45AD) of external power, and the three indicators on the panel of
distribution box will light up and the voltmeter, current meter and frequency meter will display
synchronously. Press the startup button QA 1 of the power supply, then the main contactor C1 is powered
on, the three contacts C1A of the main contactor are closed and the three-phase power supply starts to
power the instrument and power consumers. Its normally open contact C 1B is closed synchronously.
Trip the startup button QA1; C1B plays a role of self-locking. The main contactor C1 is still in the live
status, the main circuit keeps the energized status. In this status, the normally open contact (C 1C) of the
main contactor (C1) is closed, the green startup indicator is on but however, the normally closed contact
(C1D) is disconnected and the red stop indicator is off. Only when the stop button TA 1 is pressed can the
main circuit loop be cut off to power off the main contactor C1, stop power supply to the instrument and
other power consumers. When the main circuit is power off, the normally open contact C 1C of the main
contactor C1 is disconnected and the green startup indicator is off, while the normally closed contact
C1D of the main contactor C1 is restored from disconnection to connection and the red stop indicator is
on.
Control circuit of degasser
The master switch with lock is set to the Manual position. When the startup button QA of
degasser is pressed, the contactor C2 of degasser is powered on and the three normally open contacts
C2A of the contactor are closed. Now the normally open contact C 2B is also powered on synchronously.
16
Trip the startup button QA of degasser; due to the self-locking of C 2B, the contactor C2 is still in live
status, the normally open contact C 2D is closed, the green running indicator is on but however, the
normally closed contact C2C is disconnected, the red stop indicator is on. The degasser is always in the
live operating mode. When it is required to stop the degasser, it is necessary only to press the stop
button, cut off the working power supply of the contactor and stop the degasser. The normally closed
contact (C2C) of the contactor is restored from disconnection to connection and the red indicator is on.
Protection control when N neutral wire of main circuit is live
When N neutral line is connected by mistake to phase line or electric leakage occurs, the potential
difference is built between N neutral line and ground wire and in consequence, JY relay operates to
disconnect the normally closed contact JY-21A and disconnect the control circuit of the main loop, so
the main loop is protected as it is unable to activate the main contact C1.
Over-current and open-phase protection control and alarm of degasser
Due to poor insulation or open circuit and open phase, a large current is formed in degasser motor,
making the motor hot and in consequence, the thermal relay acts due to overheat, the normally closed
contact RJ1 of the thermal relay is disconnected to cut off the control circuit of the degasser, so the
degasser is powered off and is protected due to it is unable to activate the degasser.
When the thermal relay acts, its normally open contact RJ 2 is closed to make the buzzer or flash
light give acoustic and optical alarm due to power-on.
Setting positive pressure bypass and automatic master switch with lock of degasser
When the master switch is set in the positive pressure bypass position, the startup and stop buttons
of the degasser take effect. If the master switch is set in the automatic position, the startup and stop
buttons are disabled and then you can control the power-on and power-off of contactor through the
switch of mud electrode or open/close of input signal of computer and accordingly to start up or stop the
degasser, carrying out the automatic control of the operating status of degasser.
Figure 2-5 Panel drawing of distribution box of CMS mud logging unit
17
Figure 2-6 Power supply control program chart of distribution box of CMS mud logging unit
18
Figure 2-7 Schematic diagram of distribution box circuits
19
VI UPS manual
VI.1 Introduction
Welcome to use wide-frequency wide-voltage input-type UPS. For first-time users, please read
carefully the manual and keep it properly as it is very useful for your future enquiries.
Product characteristics
Real wide-frequency (50HZ30%) and wide-voltage (220V30%) input, designed for
connecting generators of all types.
Independent online design.
IGBT power device and advanced thick film circuit design.
DB9 computer communication interface.
Able to connect various nonlinear loads and resistive loads. `
VI.2 Installation
Installation position:
Insulation position depends on the actual application. The following should be noticed:
Distance between all sides of UPS and surrounding objects should be greater than 10cm.
Keep unobstructed ventilation windows on two sides of UPS.
Keep away from fire source and high temperature. Temperature in the operating
environment is 0 ~35 and RH 10~90%.
Keep away corrosive environment.
No overheat, dust or splash of rainfall in the installation position.
Installation
Warning
Only those with electrical knowledge can operate.
Installation should be conducted under the guidance and supervision of the qualified
engineer.
Before installation, please make sure that switches on the front and rear panels are OFF.
Insert plug of UPS input power source to the suitable socket of the generator or utility
power.
Connect the corresponding load to the output socket of the rear panel.
Caution
The user should calculate in advance the standard total power of the load powered by UPS to
ensure that it is within the largest load power allowable by UPS.
VI.3 Startup and running
Start and run UPS in the following steps:
Ensure that switches on the front and rear panels are OFF. Insert plug of UPS input power
source to the suitable socket of utility power.
Ensure that generator is on and running normally or utility power is already input.
Attention:
UPS battery will be discharged without input of external power supply.
Turn air switch on the rear panel to ON.

Now, UPS is in the status of bypass power output and charging the battery.
Press RUN in the front panel once to start operation.
20
Caution
Ensure that all loads are off before starting UPS. Starting UPS with loads will impact loads and
UPS, affecting service life of the product.
Test UPS output using a multimeter (should be 220V). This step is needed only in the
course of testing.
Test battery using DC shift of the multimeter. The charging voltage should be 96V1V.
This step is needed only in the course of testing.
Start and run the load normally. UPS is now put into operation.
Power off utility power for 1min and UPS should power without interruption. This step is
needed only in the course of testing.
Close UPS in the following steps:
Shut down all UPS loads.
Press STOP in the front panel continuously twice.
Turn air switch on the rear panel to OFF.
Cut off the external power.
Attention:
Turn switch on the real panel of the battery pack to OFF if UPS will not be used for a long
period.
VI.4 Maintenance
UPS, in the course of running, should be maintained regularly to ensure its reliable operation and
extend its service life. Pay attention to the following:
Keep UPS clean, free of dust and foreign matter. When UPS is off, clean it using a soft dry
cloth.
In the region without power outage for a long period, disconnect input of utility power to
UPS regularly (usually 3 months) and discharge the battery for 30% to check performance
of the battery pack.
The basic procedure to charge UPS when the battery is discharged completely:
When UPS is not used for a long period or the battery is discharged completely, UPS
should be charged as per the following procedure:
Ensure that switches on the front and rear panels are OFF.
Connect utility power (frequency 50HZ5% and voltage 220V15%).
Turn air switch on the real panel to ON, with the switch on the front panel either ON or
OFF. Charge continuously for 16 hours until battery capacity reaches 90% of the
nominal capacity.
Turn switches on the front and rear panels to OFF. Now UPS charging is completed.
Attention:
While testing discharge capacity of battery, first store load programs and data and close all
running programs to avoid data loss due to ill-performed battery.
VI.5Common trouble diagnosis and elimination

Failures Reasons Failure elimination
21
3.5.1 All indicators are off. Utility power and battery are not Connect utility power and battery.
connected. Connect utility power and charge UPS
Utility power is not connected and (Note 1).
battery is discharged completely. Replace backup fuse or fuse of the same
AC and DC fuses are broken. spec.
3.5.2 All indicators are off or off after Battery is discharged completely. Connect utility power and charge UPS
lightup for a few seconds while turning (Note 1).
it on and therefore are unable to activate
UPS.
3.5.3 Utility power indicator (green) is Utility power is not connected. Connect utility power.
off. Utility power fuse is broken. Screw up or replace fuse of the same spec.
3.5.4 Battery indicator is off. Battery fuse is broken. Replace backup fuse or fuse of the same
spec.
3.5.5 Overload indicator lights up. Output overload Reduce load to the allowed range.
3.5.6 Fault indicator lights up. Load short circuit Shut off inversion switch, eliminate short
circuited load and restart.
3.5.7 Battery indicator becomes red. Battery low Charge battery. Connect utility power and
charge UPS for over 10 hours (Note 1).
3.5.8 Battery indicator is still red after Charging fuse is broken. Replace backup fuse or fuse of the same
charging. spec.
3.5.9 No UPS output. Output line is not connected. Connect the output line.
There is not input from utility Connect utility power and battery.
power and battery. Contact directly vendor or nearby
UPS is damaged. maintenance shop.
VII Circuit failure diagnosis and elimination of explosion-proof

control box and distribution box
VII.1 Fail to start up the distribution box
In this case, the explosion-proof control box runs normally and powers distribution box, otherwise,
first check explosion-proof control box for any failure. For the feed circuit of non explosion-proof mud
logging unit, only the power supply system of distribution box is available. Therefore, check the power
distribution system once failures of strong power distribution circuits are found. Reasons for these
failures are as follow.
The indicator of three-phase power supply is off. Fu3, 30-40A or Fu4, 4-5A fuses are broken or
not installed and therefore, A, B and C three-phase power supply cannot enter the master circuit
control system of the distribution box. In this case, replace fuses.
The contact of main contactor C1 is poor or damaged. If the control circuit of main circuit cannot
self lock caused by C1B and A, B and C three-phase power supply cannot be connected due to poor
three contact points of C1A, repair or replace the main contactor.
The neutral electrified protector exceeds the set value of voltage (in general, it is 48V) and it is
required to eliminate reasons of neutral electrification or properly adjust the set value of neutral
electrification voltage.
VII.2 Degasser cannot start up
The reason is mainly that the contact of contactor 2 of degasser is poor or damaged, such as poor
contacts of C2B and three poor contact points of C 2A, and in general, it is required to repair the contacts
or replace the contactor.
VII.3 Degasser stops running and gives alarm
One phase in three-phase power supply is open.
The power supply of degasser motor exceeds the set value of current and it is required to find
reasons: short circuit occurs to the motor, poor insulation, overload such as mixing rod of degasser
is buried in the sand or there is too much accumulated slit and the bearing is rusted; it is required to
eliminate them in time.
22
VII.4 Protector tripping due to electric leakage of distribution box

First, find the short dots of the three-phase power supply and the ground and eliminate them. Due
to its special structure, tripping will also occur if users dont connect powered devices to live wire
and ground wire properly. Tripping will also occur due to reasons other than direct short circuit of
live wire and ground wire. The following method can be used for inspection.
After cutting off all air switches of the 15 power supply units, the leakage protector will not trip
under general conditions. When the main contactor works, switch in the 15 groups of air switches
in sequence and carefully observe performance of the leakage protector. If the leakage protector
operates after switching in an air switch, the failure point is just in the output line of this power
supply. Carefully find failure points and eliminate them.
The electrification of neutral line causes potential difference between neutral line and earth wire to
form the circuit of neutral line and ground, causing the operation of neutral line electrification
protection relay and making JY-21A contact disconnect. Stop powering all power supply units and
find out reasons, most of which are due to poor earth connection.
Short circuit occurs to one of the 15 air switches of power supply units. Check according to same
methods above to find out the failure and eliminate it.
VII.5 Cheep of distribution box in the logging room
UPS also cheeps sometimes, causing chaos to recorders and printers. Main reasons: unstable
frequency due to interference (electric leakage and interference wave) produced by large-power DC-
driven drill rig. Solution: connect isolation transformer to reduce cheep occurrence; adopt constant
frequency UPS. Wide-frequency constant voltage UPS is not an ideal choice.
23
Chapter III CAN Field Bus

VIII Overview
Based on CAN/DeviceNet network protocol, the open bus measurement and control system
consists of a series of intelligent field bus measurement control modules, PC/PLC communication
network cards/bridges and a series of applications based on open international standards. It is a
combination of the development of automatic technology, computer network technique and instrument
technology, and will change the traditional analog signal transmission mode. It realizes full digital
bidirectional multi-station communication between field instruments and between instrument and
control room, and conforms to the tendency of using the highly reliable serial data bus/network to
replace the connecting method of the traditional point to point analog line. The intermediate link for
signal transmitting and converting is decreased and the equipment cost is saved. The system precision
and noise immunity are improved, and the construction period is shortened. A large quantity of cable
and the expense of system engineering are saved, and the automation technology in various industries is
greatly improved. Such low cost automatic system will have a broader and broader market prospect with
the advent of field bus era and the overall popularization of computer control technology.
1.1 Grounding and isolator
Inaccurate signal transmission usually results from multipoint grounding caused by grounding
loop. There are two ways to eliminate the grounding loop: one-point grounding and using isolator. But
in real measurement and control system, one-point grounding is usually unable or difficult to realize. In
order to improve the noise immunity and reliability of electronic system, isolation interface units are
increasingly adopted in controller and field instrument to electrically isolate signals to make up the full
floating system, namely, break the resistance continuity of electrical signals to make the electrical
signals pass through isolation medium in form of modulation and demodulation and be transmitted or
converted precisely, finally eliminate the complex connections between grounding sources. The
isolators, namely the standard interface units realizing the above-mentioned input, output, electric
isolation among power sources and completing the corresponding signal conversion, usually include:
isolation distributor, isolation temperature transmitter and isolation output driver and so on.
1.2 CAN bus explosion-proof acquisition interface
Single channel or multi-channel field bus digital interface consists of DeviceNet encapsulated
isolation node (5200 series) and CAN communicator.
1.3 Explosion-proof technology
There exist containers and pipelines used to store or transport flammable liquid, gas and dust in
industrial fields such as petroleum, chemical, pharmacy, light industry and metallurgy and so on. To
ensure the safety of electric equipment used in explosive hazardous area, various explosion-proof
technologies such as flameproof, increased safety and intrinsic safety, etc. are developed. Explosion-
proof products can be produced and used only after qualification test by authorized inspection
24
organizations.
1.4 Intrinsic safety (IS)
IS, also known as safe spark type, limits the circuital energy in hazardous area to ensure the safety
of electric equipment. In zone 0, the most dangerous area, only intrinsic safety explosion-proof
technology of Ex (ia) grade is adopted according to IEC regulations.
1.5 Acquisition interface and safety parameters of its isolation node
CAN bus explosion-proof acquisition interface, installed in safety zone, is a relevant equipment of
electrical instrument in dangerous area in intrinsic safety system, used for limiting the circuital energy
in hazardous area to realize explosion-proof function of the equipment in hazardous area.
The highest permit voltage (Um) of isolation nodes: ensure the intrinsic safety performance of the
intrinsic safety terminal at isolation nodes and the highest voltage permitted inputting from the non
intrinsic safety terminal.
The highest output voltage (Um) of isolation nodes: the highest output voltage value within the
range of the highest permit voltage when the intrinsic safety terminal is open circuited.
The maximum output current (Io) of isolation nodes: the maximum output current value within the
range of the highest permit voltage when the intrinsic safety terminal is short circuited.
The maximum external capacitance (Co) of isolation nodes: the maximum external capacitance of
the intrinsic safety terminal in the case of ensuring the intrinsic safety performance.
The maximum external inductance (Lo) of isolation nodes: the maximum external inductance of
the intrinsic safety terminal in the case of ensuring the intrinsic safety performance.
1.6 Composition of the intrinsic safety explosion-proof system
The intrinsic safety explosion-proof system is an integral explosion-proof system. The intrinsic
safety system consists of the acquisition interface and devices in dangerous area. When devices such as
power supply, piezoelectric ceramics, capacitance and inductance, etc. are included in the devices in
dangerous area, they can be used after authentication by explosion-proof security inspection
organizations. And the parameters of security authentication should match the security authentication
parameters of safety barrier. When the devices in dangerous area satisfy the condition (<1.2V, <0.1A,
<25mW, <20uJ) and contain no energy storage elements such as contact switch, thermocouple, thermal
resistance, light emitting diode and bridge circuit and so on, they belong to simple devices without
further authentication and can be directly connected into intrinsically safe circuits.
The installation, use and maintenance of CAN bus explosion-proof acquisition interface should
comply with the related clauses of Safety Regulations of the Peoples Republic of China for Electric
Appliance in Explosive Hazardous Areas.
IX Characteristics and functions of SK-9N21/11 CAN bus

explosion-proof acquisition interface
2.1 Filling the domestic gaps
The full-digital intrinsic safety explosion-proof acquisition interface series of the first domestic built-
in industrial network/field bus communication protocol are the combination of intrinsic safety
25
technology and field bus technology, which conform to the development trend of the latest technology.
2.2 Compliant with the standardized/open international standards
Comply with the international standard IEC62026-3 of CAN/DeviceNet and provide standard
software support of OPC (ole for process control). The module series of standard protocol and
standardized controlling software components make it convenient for users to posses open environment
with multiple suppliers so as to break equipment supplier monopoly on software or hardware price and
freely select standard-compliant products of high cost performance. System integration suppliers no
longer need to compile various device divers, while the equipment manufacturers only need to provide
an OPC and dont need to compile various divers for different applications, thus system cost is greatly
reduced and composition of the highly networked and decentralized open computer measurement and
control system is simpler, more convenient and more flexible.
2.3 Remarkable performance
Ultra-low power consumption makes high reliability possible: drift of the conventional analog
circuit can be avoided using the method with no movable parts, low power consumption, full-digital
and programmable technology to replace the conventional potentiometer adjusting zero and full degree.
And the ultrahigh precision and reliability are ensured in the full measuring range.
The user programmable technology realizes one unit with multiple purposes: the three ports of
input signal, output signal and power source are isolated, making up the full floating system. It is not
necessary to worry about the complex electromagnetic interference, common mode interference and
environmental condition in industrial fields. The treatment of field problems is greatly simplified and
the fault point can be isolated. The possible fault will be isolated at a signal point (not on a multi-point
card or in a larger system) to avoid influence on the whole system due to the fault of one point. Even in
the case of such expected events as lightning stroke, the large-scale paralysis of the system can be
avoided to the maximum degree.
2.4 Complete species and strong functions
Acquisition interface serialization and the function of signal isolation, power distribution,
amplification, modulation and conversion have covered the most extensive demand in process control
and simplified design. The embedded real-time operating system is adopted to improve the real-time
performance, reliability and scalability of the system and support complicated algorithms. The mature
and reliable multitask real-time kernel can be used to simplify the tasks of complex process and tight
schedule and provide applications such as field bus node configuration management, parameters
calibration and fault diagnosis.
2.5 Wide voltage range
Wide voltage range of power source: 15-25VDC (40mA @24VDC).
2.6 Wide-spread applications and applicable to hazardous areas
SK-9N21/11 CAN bus explosion-proof acquisition interface has increased-safety aluminum-alloy
shell with protection ability of IP65 and can be installed in hazardous areas.
2.7 High cost performance
Field signals can be transmitted to the controller directly in the form of digital signals through the
interface, instead of passing through a large number of signal input and output cards. The intermediate
26
links of signal transmission will be saved and heavy equipment investment can be saved for users who
need intrinsic safety explosion-proof function (for example, the input process of traditional analog is
that the analog signal after passing through the isolation safety barrier is first modulated into digital
signal, then demodulated into analog signal after isolation, outputted into the analog-to-digital converter
of the subsequent DCS system, finally converted into digital signal. With a lot of signal conversions
involved, precision loss is likely to occur). When the digital interface of the safety barrier can be
interoperated with various controllers reliably, the acquisition interface with CAN bus will become the
mainstream of the market and be the updated product of the traditional safety barrier. An integral
solution of the minimum cost for field isolation (explosion-proof) and signal regulation directly
connecting with industrial computers or PLCs, DCS to reduce the intermediate input and output cards
and provide OPC SERVER or other drivers.
2.8 Authoritative identification
Pass the safety certification of national instrument explosion-proof inspection station NWPSI
(international explosion-proof professional association members)
X Working environments of SK-9N21/11 CAN bus explosion-

proof acquisition interface
Temperature: -40-+60;
Relative humidity: <95% RH;
No corrosive gas;
Installation places and explosion-proof performances: it can be installed in safe places indoors or
outdoors and in explosive hazardous places. This series of products have increased-safety shell
with protection ability of IP65.
Explosion-proof symbol: Exe [ia]CT4.
XI Installation steps, methods and precautions of SK-

9N21/11CAN bus explosion-proof acquisition interface
Installation, use and maintenance of explosion-proof acquisition interface should comply with the
Safety Regulations of the Peoples Republic of China for Electric Appliance in Explosive
Hazardous Areas and GB50058-92 Code for Design of Electric Installations within Explosion and
Fire Hazard Atmospheres;
Only when this series of products match the intrinsic safety devices (such as transmitters,
proximity switches and photoelectric switches) examined by explosion-proof inspection
organizations, can they make up the intrinsic safety explosion-proof system. When field devices
meet the condition of simple devices, they can be connected into intrinsically safe circuits, but
connecting cable parameters should meet the requirements described in 4.6. For the intrinsic safety
cable, insulating sheath and filler must be available; the outer diameter of three- or four-core cable
is f 8 (three-core cable for the analog signal input and four-core cable for the switch signal input);
the cross sectional area of core wire is greater than 0.5 square millimeter. The distributed
capacitance (Cc) and distributed inductance ( Lc ) of the cable should be less than the values in
product parameter tables: Cc<Co-Ci, Lc<Lo-Li; (Ci and Li are the internal equivalent capacitance
and inductance of intrinsic safety field instruments respectively);
27
Field installation and maintenance should comply with the caution of open the cover after power
off. The maximum surface temperature of the shell is less than 75 ;
The outer diameter of the guiding cable sheath should be f 10- f 12mm. While using the crimping
nut should be tightened to make the inner diameter of the seal ring hug the cable sheath firmly. The
aged cable sheath of the seal ring needs to be changed in time;
Explosion-proof shell must be grounded according to the standard;
CAN/Device Net field bus cable should comply with the relevant standards. The number of nodes
of each bus is not more than 64 and the total length of the main line is not more than 500m. The
outer diameter should be f 10- f 12mm.
For external structure diagram, refer to section V.
The explosion-proof box cover should not be opened rashly. If the built-in isolation nodes need to
be replaced, the cover should be opened softly to avoid damaging the box cover and paint film;
When the intrinsic safety inlet line port of the device is superfluous or not used, it should be
covered using the plastic protecting cap;
Attentions for maintenance: due to compact structures and high requirements of explosion
protection, when product failures are found, the explosion-proof box cover can be opened after
power off, and then the corresponding failure isolating node will be dismounted and replaced by a
new isolating node, which will shorten the maintenance time effectively;
Attentions for wiring: due to the high requirements of explosion protection, if no attention is paid
to the essentials for installation and wiring such as wiring, wire stripping, the inner diameter of
cable compacting seal ring and the end position of the cable sheath and so on, the explosion-proof
and seal requirements cant be reached even the wire has been probably connected. Therefore,
good understanding of the correct essentials for wiring is very important. Its essentials: the inner
diameter of cable compacting seal ring must be consistent with the outer diameter of the cable
sheath, where, 1mm allowance is permitted. When stripping the plastic sheath of the cable, the
mouth of the sheath should be on the same vertical section without laceration to ensure the external
ring of the rubber seal ring to press on the intact cable sheath completely. During installation, try to
avoid placing the nameplate in the position difficult to show the name plate, such as against wall,
etc.
XII Structure diagram

Encapsulated isolation node

CAN
Inlet and outlet of CAN bus shield Interface of sensor channel

cable
Figure 3-1 External appearance and internal structural diagram of SK-9N11 series single-
channel CAN bus explosion-proof acquisition interface
28
Encapsulated CAN bus isolation node Card connecting to CAN bus shield cable
Null channel, can install isolation node

Interface of sensor channel
Inlet and outlet of CAN bus shield cable
SK-9N21 bottom structure
Figure 3.2 External appearance and internal structural diagram of SK-9N21 series multi-channel CAN
bus explosion-proof acquisition interface
Attention:
For the input of IS5241-EX encapsulated analog signal, IS5216/B-EX encapsulated switch
signal (pump stroke), IS5216/C-EX encapsulated switch signal (drawwork) and IS5216/D-EX
encapsulated switch signal (flow), definitions on the output terminal wiring are different for
the four kinds of CAN bus isolation nodes, nodes in different channels cant be replaced at
will and only the same kind of nodes can be exchanged.
To ensure consistence of the internal wiring circuit board between SK-9N21 multi-channel and SK-
9N11 single-channel CAN bus explosion-proof acquisition interfaces, standard configuration will be
provided for the SK-9N21 multi-channel CAN bus explosion-proof acquisition interface of Shenkai if
no special requirements are proposed by the user: 8 two-wire IS5241-EX encapsulated analog signal
channels, 1 IS5216/C-EX encapsulated switch signal input (drawwork) channel and 3 IS5216/B-EX
encapsulated switch signal input (pump stroke) channels for the drilling platform area; 8 two-wire
IS5241-EX encapsulated analog signal channels and 4 IS5216/B-EX encapsulated switch signal input
(pump stroke) channels for the inlet and outlet areas. For the SK-9N11 single-channel CAN bus
explosion-proof acquisition interface, only 1 three-wire IS5241-EX encapsulated analog signal channel
is provided to connect three-wire analog sensors.
29
XIII Technical parameters

Two kinds of bus signal output intrinsic safety isolation nodes are available inside the SK-9N21/11
CAN bus explosion-proof acquisition interface.
5216/-EX
Switch signal input type CAN/Device Net bus signal output intrinsic safety isolation barrier
interface can be used as the counter or cymometer depending on the built-in software. For technical
parameters, see Table 3-1.
CAN/Device Net bus intrinsic safety nodes of C-type (drawwork) count input type: two-channel
intrinsic safety NAMUR standard proximity switch input sets counter value through CAN bus and
simultaneously performs positive counting or negative counting according to phase relationship of
90 degrees input by two stitches and 4 times frequency counting according to one of the two input.
The error is 1 and the highest frequency allowable for access through bus is 10Hz. Both the set
value and output value are count values. The unit is pulse number and the data type is 16bits
integer.
CAN/Device Net bus intrinsic safety nodes of B-type (pump stroke) frequency input type: single-
channel intrinsic safety NAMUR standard proximity switch input, the frequency range 0-1920
stroke/min, the permitted error 1 stroke/min. The output is the number of frequencies, in
stroke/min. The data type is 16bits integer. This interface can filter mechanical dither and signal
fluctuations caused by all kinds of interferences and the response time constant t can be set by
master operating station on CAN bus.
CAN/Device Net bus intrinsic safety nodes of D-type (flow) count input type: single-channel
intrinsic safety NAMUR standard proximity switch input, the frequency response <2kHz, count
down according the input pulse. The count value is 65535 while resetting. Subtract a count for each
pulse input. The count value will become 65535 automatically after reducing to zero. The process
will repeat. The error is 1, and the output data type is 16bits integer.
Table 3-1 Technical parameters table of 5216/-Ex isolation barrier
No. Item 5216-Ex technical parameters Remarks
1 Explosion-proof symbol [Exia]IIC
2 The highest permit voltage: Um 250Vac
3 Safety parameters 10.5V, 800, 14 mA *
4 NEPSI authentication parameters Uo=10.5V lo=14mA *
Co=2.4uF Lo=165mH
5 Channel number 2 *
6 Power supply voltage on the side of field 9V (internal resistance of power supply *
sensor <1k)
7 Characteristics of the signal input The field input current lin>2.1 mA *
The corresponding output is: 1
The input current lin<1.2 mA
8 Response time 0.1ms *
9 CAN communicator 1 *
10 Rate of CAN communication port 125K(bps) *
11 Isolation voltage 2,500V *
b. Pump stroke calculation *
12 Software function
c. Drawworks counting
d. High speed flow counting
30
13 Power supply Voltage: 15-25Vdc (40mA@24Vdc) *

14 Protection capacity of shell: IP65 Encapsulated type
5241-EX
Analog signal 4-20mA input type CAN/Device Net bus signal output intrinsic safety isolation
nodes provide isolation distribution. The input is 4-20mA analog signal of single-channel intrinsic
safety two-wire system, the output digital signal of DeviceNet protocol, the current unit uA and the data
type 16bits integer. The number of nodes for each segment of bus is not more than 64. For technical
parameters, see Table 3-2.
Table 3-2 Technical parameters table of 5241/-Ex isolation barrier
No. Item 5241-Ex technical parameters Remarks
1 Explosion-proof symbol [Exia]IIC
2 The highest permit voltage: Um 250Vac
3 Safety parameters 28V, 300, 93mA
4 NEPSI authentication parameters Uo=28V lo=93mA
Co=0.083uF Lo=165mH
5 Channel number 1
6 Wiring system 2/3 wire system *
7 Accuracy 0.1%F.S *
8 Distribution voltage When the current is 20 mA, the distribution *
voltage15V.
9 The output signal CAN bus data output *
10 Temperature drift 0.01%F.S/C *
11 CAN communicator 1 *
12 Rate of CAN communication port 125K(bps) *
13 Power supply Voltage: 15-25Vdc (55mA@24Vdc) *
14 Protection capacity of shell: IP65 Encapsulated type
XIV Wiring
Instructions on connection terminal: according to the standard regulations recommended by the
international ODVA (Open DeciceNet .Vendor Association), the color code and definition of
CAN/DeciceNet bus cable are shown in Table 3-3.
Table 3-3 The wiring table of CAN bus explosion-proof acquisition interface
Terminal No. Terminal definition Color code
CAN 1 CAN-H High signal White
Bus cable 2 CAN-L Low signal Blue
3 V+ Positive power supply Red
4 V+ Negative power supply Black
5 END Shield Shielding wire
31
Sensor Three- or four- 1 Common Common negative Analog input node A

Adopting core needle terminal Note: two-wire analog input node
YD20 series socket (panel- 2 Supp. Positive distribution adopts three-core needle socket and
or imported mounted ) terminal three-wire analog input node adopts
socket 3 Curr.in current signal terminal four-core needle socket.
connector. 4 Shi shielding layer (Same to 9N11)
Four-core hole 1 IN1 Phase A signal Drawworks node (C)
socket (panel- 2 IN2 Phase B signal
mounted ) 3 Supp. Common positive
Node C distribution terminal
4 Shi Shielding layer
Four-core needle 1 IN1 Signal Pump stroke and flow nodes
socket (panel- 2 NC Null (B, D)
mounted ) Node B 3 Supp. Positive distribution
or D terminal
4 Shi shielding layer
Sensor Three-core 1 Common Common negative Analog input node A

Adopting needle terminal 2-3 for two-wire sensors, 1-2-3 for
XS series socket (panel- 2 Supp. Positive distribution three-wire sensors, 1(-)-3(+) for top
socket mounted ) terminal drive client to connect signals. (Same
connector. 3 Curr.in current signal terminal to 9N11).
Shell Shielding layer
Six-core hole 1 IN1 Phase A signal Drawworks node (C)
socket (panel- 2 IN2 Phase B signal
mounted ) 3 Supp. Common positive
Node C distribution terminal
4 Shi Shielding layer
Three-core needle 1 IN1 Signal Pump stroke and flow nodes
socket (panel- 2 NC Null (B, D)
mounted ) Node B 3 Supp. Positive distribution terminal
or D Shell Shielding layer
Connection problems of bus shielding layer.

Generally, the main wire shielding layer has reliable grounding in the machine room, and the
shielding wire usually adopts one-end machine room grounding mode. Grounding terminals are
available in both ends of the communicator junction box of SK-9N21/11 CAN bus explosion-proof
acquisition interface, to which the cable shielding layer can be connected.
XV Product model naming and variety features

8.1 SK-9N11 series single-channel CAN bus explosive-proof acquisition interface
SK-9N11: four types (A.B.C.D) can be selected in the box.
Incorporate 5241-EX encapsulated analog input isolation node (node A);
32
Incorporate 5216/B-EX encapsulated pump stroke isolation node (node B);

Incorporate 5216/C-EX encapsulated drawwork isolation node (node C);
Incorporate 5216/D-EX encapsulated high-speed counting isolation node (node D);
Explosion symbol: Exem[ia]CT5.
8.2 SK-9N21 series multi-channel CAN bus explosive-proof acquisition interface
Each set of device can hold 12 encapsulated isolation nodes of 5200-EX series at most.
The type of the 12 incorporated isolation nodes is 8A+4D. The number of nodes can be reduced as
appropriate (note: for the meanings of A, B, C and D, see the instructions above).
Explosion symbol: Exem[ia]CT5.
XVI CAN adapter card and bus power

CAN adapter card is inserted in PCI bus slot of computer (collector) (Figure 3-3). There are two 9-
core CAN acquisition interfaces on the adapter (Figure 3-3). Interface No.0 is the default setting.
The current software supports 32 sensor channels totally. If interface No.0 is damaged, the user can
switch to interface No.1.
CAN acquisition adapter card
Figure 3-3 Position of CAN acquisition adapter card inside the collector
Interface No.0 of acquisition card
Interface No.1 of acquisition card
Figure 3-4 Appearance of CAN acquisition adapter card
A 125 resistance is set on each CAN socket of the adapter card. CAN signal is output through
33
DB9 (needle-shaped socket) and its pins are defined as follows:

Pin 2, CAN-L (low level);
Pin 5, CAN Shield (shield line);
Pin 7, CAN-L (high level);
CAN bus uses 24V switching power supply, which is installed in the cabinet of SK-3F02 auxiliary
unit (SK-3F02 unit includes: 24V switching power supply, video distributor and HUB). Figure 3-5,
3-6 and 3-7 are the front, rear and interior views of the auxiliary unit respectively.
Figure 3-5 Front view of SK-3F02 auxiliary unit

Connect CAN bus cable here
Power switch CAN bus signal output to collector
Figure 3-6 Rear view of SK-3F02 auxiliary unit

Connect CAN bus cable here CAN bus signal output to collector here
34 24V/4A switching power supply

Connect CAN bus cable here CAN bus signal output to collector here
24V/4A switching power supply
Figure 3-7 Interior view of SK-3F02 auxiliary unit

24V power supply supplies the CAN bus through YD20K5Z 5-core socket (installed on the back
panel of SK-3F02 auxiliary unit).
The pin definitions of all 5-core connectors (Figure 3-8) on the CAN bus shielding cable are
as follows:
Pin 1, CAN Shield (shield line);
Pin 2, +24VDC (red line);
Pin 3, 0V (black line);
Pin 4, CAN-H (white line);
Pin 5, CAN-L (blue line);
Hole socket Needle socket
Figure 3-8 Pin definition of CAN bus 5-core connector
35
The red line and black line in the CAN bus cable are a group 24V power supply wires for all
devices on the CAN bus and they are connected to + (red line) and - (black line) of 24V/4A
switching power supply respectively. The white line and blue line are a group digital signal wires
for all devices on the CAN bus and they are connected to Pin 7 (white line) and Pin 2 (blue line) of
DB9-core socket at the back of SK-3F02 auxiliary unit respectively. The exposed shield line is
connected to Pin 5 of DB9-core socket.
SK-3F02 auxiliary unit transmits CAN_H and CAN_L digital signals from the bus cable to
CAN acquisition adapter card through the connected DB9-core socket and multi-core cables
(Figure 3-9) between acquisition adapter cards inside the collector.
CAN bus signals

connect to CAN
acquisition card
from SK-3F02
Figure 3-8 CAN bus signal interface at the back of the collector
The application example of SK-9N11/21 series CAN bus explosion-proof acquisition interface is shown
in the following Figure 3-9.
36
Figure 3-9 Schematic diagram of CAN wiring
Remarks (For the old nodes of CAN bus)

(i) Classification of CAN bus sensors
The isolation barriers that we use at present are classified into three types and please distinguish them
when using.
SK-9N01CAN bus drawworks isolation barrier, commonly known as C-type node, is only used to
connect the drawworks sensor.
SK-9N02CAN bus pump stroke isolation barrier, commonly known as B-type node, is used to
connect pump stroke and table speed sensors.
SK-9N03CAN bus analog isolation barrier, commonly known as A-type node, is used in all the
sensors of 4-20mA output signal; A-type node is subdivided into three types: two-wire system and
three-wire system and top drive client, which will be identified in the stainless steel sign on the
shell of explosion proof isolation barrier when leaving the factory.
Attention: Node A of three-wire system is used only to connect SK-8N07G electric torque
sensor, SP-1102 total hydrocarbon sensor and General Monitors H2S and others are two-wire
system. Wiring methods of top-drive rotation speed and top-drive torque are also different.
SK-8J06 and SK-9N01 make up the bus drawworks isolation sensor. SK-9N01 is CAN bus
drawworks isolation barrier and its connection terminals are shown in Figure 3-4.
SK-8B06FG and SK-9N02 make up the bus pump stroke sensor and table speed sensor. SK-9N02
is CAN pump stroke isolation barrier and its connection terminals are shown in Figure 3-4.
37
Figure 3-4 Figure 3-5
After equipped with SK-9N03, various 4-20mA analog sensors make up the corresponding bus
sensor. SK-9N03 is CAN bus isolation barrier of 4-20mA analog input with the types of two-wire
system and three-wire system. Its connection terminals are shown in the Figure 3-6 and Figure 3-7.
Figure 3-6 Two-wire system Figure 3-7 Three-wire system
(ii) Explanation to use of CAN bus node

XVI.2 Major purpose and scope of application
CAN bus explosion-proof node is an important component of the CAN field bus system. The
sensor is connected directly to the node and after processed by the gateway inside the CAN node, the
sensor signal is converted to serial coding of CAN bus protocol and transmitted.
Depending on processing signals, CAN bus nodes can be classified into three types: A, B and C.
Type A node mainly processes 4-20mA current signals such as hang weight, stand-pipe pressure and is
commonly known as the analog node; type B node processes the proximity switch pulse signals such as
rotary speed and pump stroke, and is commonly known as the pump stroke node; type C node processes
38
the coding or pulse signals for direction judging, for example, drawworks and is commonly known as
the drawworks node.
For the bus box, the airtight, water-proof, anti-corrosive and explosion-proof design is adopted and
the sensor output is intrinsic safety signal.
The CAN field bus system consists of CAN bus sensor node, backbone cable and matched
resistance of the terminals and all the sensors are connected by a four-core cable to accomplish the
transmission of information required.
XVI.3 Parameters
+10%
Working voltage: 24VDC -20%
CAN communication port: one

CAN communication speed: 125kbps
Protection capacity of shell: IP65
Explosion-proof symbol of isolation safety barrier: Exd(ia)IIBT5
Other parameters:
SK-9N03 (the type of explosion-proof junction box is SK-9N05-A)
Input signal: 4-20mA
Power supply voltage on the side of field sensor: 15V(20mA)
Accuracy: 0.1F.S
SK-9N02 (the type of explosion-proof junction box is SK-9N05-B)
Input signal: when the input current >2.1mA, the output is 1;
When the input current <1.2mA, the output is 0
Power supply voltage on the side of field sensor: 9V (internal resistance of power supply
<1k)
Measuring range of the field sensor: 30-1920 strokes/min
Measuring accuracy of the field sensor: 1F.S
SK-9N01 (the type of explosion-proof junction box is SK-9N05-C)
Input signal: when the input current >2.1mA, the output is 1;
When the input current <1.2mA, the output is 0.
Power supply voltage on the side of field sensor: 9V (internal resistance of power supply
<1k).
Measuring range of the field sensor: 0-9999
Measuring accuracy of the field sensor: 10mm/single
XVI.4 Operating principle and main structure of product
The inside of nodes consists of one CAN isolation barrier, two bus hubs, a signal input socket and
the shell body. The internal and external layouts of nodes are shown in Figure 3-8 and Figure 3-9.
39
Figure 3-8 Internal layout
Figure 3-9 External layout

After acquired by CAN node, the input sensor signal is converted to CAN bus serial coding data
for outputting. Depending on the sensor signals processed, the corresponding CAN isolation barrier is
installed. The blue CAN isolation barrier itself has met explosion-proof requirements and in order to
meet the explosion-proof goal in the system, the product is installed in the sealed quadrangular metal
cabinet and the three outlet cables for input and output are fixed at the bottom of cabinet by screwing up
the sealer, having good waterproof effect.
The instrument provides various installations for users to select flexibly. It can be installed by
40
adopting the mounting hole attached to the cabinet (you can see four mounting holes of 6mm in
diameter after opening the explosion-proof shell). It can be also installed or hoisted by adopting the
mounting hole on the mounting board and can be installed by adopting C-type clamp as well, shown in
the following Figure 3-10.
C-clip Mounting plate Flashing
Anti-explosion of
SK-9N05 CAN bus
PG incoming terminal
Figure 3-10 Schematic diagram of installing the C-type clamp
41
XVI.5 Wiring diagram of CAN bus node
Figure 3-11 Schematic diagram of connecting SK-9N0X CAN bus
42
XVI.6 Installation and debugging

Connection: it is necessary only to insert the plug of the corresponding CAN backbone cable
in the corresponding needle socket and hole socket on the node and insert the plug of sensor
in the corresponding socket. For detailed wiring see Schematic diagram of connecting CAN
bus node.
Mounting position: in order to prolong the service life of instrument and for the purpose of
measuring accuracy, it is required to avoid the heat source, vibration source and
electromagnetic radiation when using the product and fix it in proper places. When mounting,
the inlet end shall be downward. Otherwise, it will affect the waterproof performance of
system.
Note: the product is a kind of explosion-proof instrument, applicable to zones 1 and 2, the
dangerous places in explosive gas environment. When using in the dangerous places, it is
required to cut off the power supply before wiring and opening the cover and the shell shall
be reliably connected to ground in order to ensure the safety performance of this product.
XVI.7 Maintenance
The body of instrument is made of aluminum alloy but it may be corroded to some extent if it
is used for long time due to the fact that the water quality in well site is alkaline. It is
suggested to enhance external protection procedures to prolong its life and improve its
reliability;
Erect cables under the principles not to hinder the field operations of operators in well site,
uneasy to buck, damage, safety and reliability;
When installing and using, users shall comply with requirements in this manual and related
regulations as well in GB3836.15-2000 Electrical Apparatus for Explosive Gas Atmospheres
Part15: Electric Installation in Hazardous Areas (other than coal mines) and GB50058-1992
Code for Design of Electric Installations within Explosion and Fire Hazard Atmospheres;
After the product is wired and installed, the shell test shall be conducted, namely to check
whether the air-tight performance of shell reaches the standard or not.
XVI.8 Common troubles and elimination methods
If you suspect that troubles occur to the product, you can conduct the replacement
comparison by replacing the internal isolation barrier. Generally speaking, the isolation barrier is
damaged due to fuse damage; for the troubles in the aspect of cable, you can measure the
resistance by using a multimeter to eliminate them. If it is sure that the product is damaged, you
can purchase related parts from our company or send the product to our company for repair.
43
(i) Schematic diagram of connecting field bus
44
Figure 3-16 Schematic diagram of connecting field bus

(ii) Key points to field use of CAN bus sensor system
XVI.9 Problem about communication stability
According to transmission specifications of CAN bus, the length of backbone cable is up to
500m and the number of accessed CAN nodes is up to 64 when transmitting at the communication
speed of 125Kbps.
In general, the number of accessed CAN nodes for most logging units is about 23 and the
length of backbone cable is below 300m. If unstable communication phenomena appear (the
overtime occurs to some nodes at times or some nodes are available at times or unavailable at
other times when searching for nodes even the same node is searched for more than once), the
following points shall be noticed in the course of installing.
Whether the terminal resistance is connected correctly or not.
There shall be two terminal resistances: one is connected to the CAN bus node at the end of
backbone cable and the other is welded on the CAN adapter card. The role of terminal resistance is
to absorb the excessive energy of electrical pulse on the signal line to prevent signal aliasing due
to reflection, which will give rise to communication error. Frequent communication errors will
lead to the reset of CAN bus. Such cycle will make the CAN bus basically impossible to
communicate normally.
Inspection method: disconnect CAN bus and adapter card and check whether the
terminal resistance is available or not using 200 grade of VC9806 multimeter. The resistance
of pins 4 and 5 shall be about 125. If the terminal resistance is not connected, the
communication will be unstable. If normal, it is also required to check whether pins of CAN
cable are insulated from each other (out of range for 2M grade of the multimeter).
Whether the backbone cable has branches or not (namely, whether the bus topology is correct
or not).
CAN bus backbone cable shall be a straight gut from beginning to end and no branch is
allowed. Specifically speaking, the left and right terminals of the CAN bus node are used to
connect the backbone cable while the middle terminal is only used to connect the sensor.
Working voltage of bus
It is specified in the CAN bus specifications that the working voltage of bus is 24V. Due to
the voltage drop loss in the current transmission, the unstable communication will occur when the
working voltage on a CAN node on the bus is less than 19V and in this case, we can step up the
output voltage of switching power supply of the bus, but it shall be not more than 26V.
Whether screws of backbone cable are loose or not.
The connection of core wires of backbone cable and sockets is fastened with small screws. If
screws on a wire are not tightened, the loose contact appears, leading to overtime communication
45
of bus or overtime of some sensor. In this case, the communication is good at times and bad at
other times. When the overtime occurs to a sensor, check the plug of the corresponding node,
make sure the wire head screws are tightened and eliminate troubles, if any.
XVI.10 Protection class of bus connector
The protection class of CAN bus connector is IP65 and the connectors can be plugged for
10000 times.
It is found the air-tightness is bad in actual applications, which is due to unfastened field bus
and frequent move. The dirt such as oil sludge and sediment load etc. in the well site enters the
sealing parts of socket connectors, giving rise to the decrease in protection class of connectors.
XVI.11 Problem about fuse of CAN node
CAN nodes provided by Shenkai Company meet explosion-proof requirement. To meet the
compulsory explosion-proof regulations, three fast-acting fuses are installed inside the node and
arbitrary change in their specs is not allowed. It is not allowed to prevent fuse failure by increasing
the current spec. of fuse without paying due attention to the possible explosion accidents caused
by dangerous gas.
Due to the fact the equivalent parameters of resettable fuse cannot meet CAN communication
requirements, the fuse cannot be used on the CAN node.
Before new technology that can resolve this problem appears, users are suggested to pay
attention to the following points:
After erecting the CAN bus sensor system and before powering on the CAN bus, first check
bus insulation and power on only when it is normal.
Try to avoid replacing CAN nodes under electriferous conditions. When it is impossible to
avoid the above, do not insert before alignment of locating slots of the socket connector. In
this way, fuse failure caused by the surge current generated due to forced insertion to wrong
pins can be avoided.
It is not allowed to open the cover of CAN node box. For such repairs, Shenkai Company
provides special services upon request by users.
Before connection, socket connectors shall be protected with care to avoid sticking to
conducting fluid such as mud fluid and rain. Clean and dry connectors stuck with mud fluid
and rain.
46
Chapter IV Installation and Operation of Instrument

XVII Installation and arrangement of logging unit
The logging room of mud logging unit is installed in the place where drilling platform can be
viewed and the job situation on drill platform can be observed directly. For a drilling team
onshore, the logging unit should be placed on a flat place 30-50m away from the rig and on the
side of drilling fluid outlet; while for an offshore platform, it is usually installed on the flat deck
close to the pile of the movable drilling platform.
After placing the instrument room, you should connect it to ground.
If it is installed on offshore platform, good grounding can be made by welding the shell of
logging room with the deck.
If installed on the land, the instrument is equipped with grounding rod specially for
grounding. Installing method: punch the grounding rod into the ground with 200mm upper
end above the surface. Connect one end of the ground wire with the grounding rod and the
other end to the shell of the logging room or the grounding rod of the flameproof transformer.
See Figure 1-1 and 1-2.
Then, connect the inlet pipe of logging room with the water pipeline on wellsite platform
properly to ensure water supply to logging room. See Figure 1-3.
Grounding terminal
Figure 1-1 Grounding terminal inside the rear cabin of the mud logging unit
Grounding terminal
47
Figure 1-2 Grounding terminal on the cabin of the mud logging unit
Water-supply pipeline
Drainage pipeline
Figure 1-3 Water-supply pipeline of the logging unit
Warning
The grounding device is an extremely important safety measure, and it should be
checked regularly. When its in normal operation, it should be checked and tested once
half a year to check whether the conductor is broken and the connection is reliable.
Lightning protection measures of logging unit

Lightning protection measures: the shell of the logging room is metal, with the
function of electromagnetic protection, but it should be grounded well. Usually,
two grounding pegs are required to plug into the underground 2m, and the ground
wire should be connected well with the shell of the logging room.
Measures for preventing power cable from introducing lightning electromagnetic
pulse: install the lightning arrester at the input end of three-phase power within the
flameproof transformer (Chapter II, Figure 2-6), with the purpose of guiding the
lightning electromagnetic pulse to the lightningproof device. When the lightning
electromagnetic pulse enters the lightning arrester through the power wires, it will
generate high voltage to guide circuit of the stimulated current to lead the high
voltage to the underground through the grounding peg inside.
Measures of CAN bus: the photoelectric isolator is added at the input end of the
CAN card (bus acquisition board). When the lightning electromagnetic pulse enters
CAN card through CAN bus, it will not enter the internal circuit thanks to
optoelectronic isolator, only the isolator is damaged. Later, we only need to replace
the photoelectric isolator on the CAN card.
Measures for preventing signal cable from introducing lightning electromagnetic
pulse (the focus is the signal input part on the logging site): the signal cable must
adopt cable with shielding layer and one-end grounding instead of two-end
48
grounding, otherwise, the capacitance coupling effect will occur on the signal
cable, and the interference signal will enter the inside of the logging unit using
coupling capacitance.
Attention:
A simple judging method for the failure of the insulating arrestor: disconnect external
wiring and test using insulating megger of 1000V. It is qualified if the reading is greater
than 500M.
XVIII Connection and installation of power

supply and distribution system
After the logging unit is installed and placed properly, connect an external power source of
380V/50HZ with three-phase and four-wire (three-phase live line, null line) for an onshore
wellsite or an external power source with three-phase and three-wire (three-phase live line and no
null line) for an offshore platform.
XIX Introduction and installation of the sensor
After the power supply and distribution system is installed, different sensors can be installed
and calibrated: the following installation is not only limited to the sensor instruments of standard
configuration, it is a general standard installation mode of field sensors in Shenkai Company.
Attention:
Among sensors equipped in SK-CMS mud logging unit, except the drawworks and
pump stroke sensors belonging to pulse signal, all other sensors belong to sensors of
4~20mA analog signal. Analog sensors can be classified into two types: two-wire system
and three-wire system according to the differences of electricity consumption and power
supply mode. Analog sensors belonging to three-wire sensors in Shenkai Company
mainly include: General Monitors S214 hydrogen sulfide (H 2S) sensor, SK-8N07G
electric torque sensor and SK-8N21 holder type torque sensor (optional parts), and
others are two-wire sensors.
XIX.1 Sk-8J06 explosion-proof drawworks sensor

It is used for measuring the drilling depth parameters.
Overview
SK-8J06 explosion-proof drawworks sensor is installed on the drawworks shaft and it can
monitor the angular displacement generated by the rotation of drawworks shaft in the whole
drilling operation. Changes in hook height during drilling can be obtained through calculation,
thus the current drilling depth can be obtained.
The detector switch and a ferruginous blade are installed inside the explosion-proof
drawworks sensor. When rotating with the drawworks shaft, the blade will pass through the
sampling channel of two detector switches with phase difference of 90 to send out two groups of
49
corresponding electric pulse signals. The corresponding direction of angular displacement and
changing value can be obtained after the signals are sent into the instrument for identifying and
processing. Changes in hook height during drilling can be obtained through calculation, thus the
current drilling depth can be obtained.
Technical indicators
Working voltage: 9VDC
Output signal: 1-3mA (NAMUR signal)
Working temperature: -40-+85
The maximum rotation speed: 1250rpm
The tooth number of the coded disk: 12 teeth
Explosion symbol: Exia II BT4
Explosive-proof certification number: GYB00562
Installation and connection
Installation
Installing position: it can be installed on both ends of the drum shaft of drawworks, but the
sequence of the output phase is opposite. To determine the shaft direction, the drawwork backward
switch settings are available in the software. There is a guard shield on the outmost side of the
drawworks shaft end face. When the length of the guard shield is less than that of the sensor, if the
sensor protrudes over the length of the guard shield after installation, it is suggested to move the
guard shield outwards or work a pup joint to connect the sensor outside the shield.
Installation procedures: First, dismantle the guard shield on the drum shaft end face and
pneumatic joint of the gas-guide tap, and connect the G3/4 tube teeth of this sensor. Second,
connect the gas-guide tap to the sensor and then assemble the guard shield (Figure 3.1-1).
Attention:
The fixed stainless frame and the pneumatic pipeline clamp must be connected firmly;
otherwise it may cause sensor line broken during high speed running of the drawworks.
50
Figure 3.1-1 Schematic diagram of installing drawworks sensor

Connection
The drawworks sensor signal output line of CAN bus type is equipped with a four-core
aviation plug. Insert the four-core aviation plug of the drawworks sensor signal output line (black)
into the four-core hole socket corresponding to 9N21 interface box and screw it up (Figure 3.1-1).
Pin definition of aviation connector: 1, signal A (green); 2, signal B (black); 3, +9VCD (red);
4, shielding layer (blue).
Common troubles and elimination
If the drawworks sensor has no signal output in the course of the rotation of drawworks
shaft, namely, troubles occur to two pulses or one pulse, first check the extension cable
51
for any breakage or damage.

If you suspect that troubles occur to the drawworks sensor, you can take down 8J06
sensor from the drawworks, slowly rotate the drawworks sensor shaft under electrifying
conditions. At the same time, measure voltage at the two groups of input end of the
isolation barrier respectively (voltages between 9V+ and signal terminal). If the
drawworks sensor works normally, there will be 4-8V changes in voltage between the
above line terminals. If it is sure that the sensor is damaged, you can purchase the related
parts from our company or send the sensor to our company for repair.
Maintenance
The body of sensor is made of stainless steel, but it may be corroded to some extent if it is
used for long time due to the fact that the water quality in well site is alkaline. It is
suggested to enhance external protection procedures to prolong its life and improve its
reliability;
Erect cables under the principles not to hinder the field operations of operators on well
site, uneasy to buck or damage, safety and reliability;
When installing and using, users shall comply with requirements in this manual and in the
service manual of safety barrier and related regulations as well in GB3836.15-2000
Electrical Apparatus for Explosive Gas Atmospheres Part15: Electric Installation in
Hazardous Areas (other than coal mines) and GB50058-1992 Code for Design of Electric
Installations within Explosion and Fire Hazard Atmospheres.
XIX.2 SK-8B06F pump stroke/table speed sensors

It is used for measuring pump stroke and table speed.
Overview
SK-8B06F/ SK-8B06FG pump stroke and table speed sensors are of inductive two-wire system
proximity switch integrated through the fixed support and inlet proximity switch, used for
measuring pump stroke or table speed. It has features of wide voltage range of power supply, high-
precision repeating location, quick frequency response, long service life, vibration resistance,
corrosion resistance and water-proof and so on. Its anti-hazard classification is intrinsic safety
type.
8B06FG:-40+85
Rated working voltage: 9VDC
Figure 3.2-1 Appearance of SK-8B06F sensor
The maximum output current: 1-3mA
The effective action distance: 8B06F32.4mm
52
8B06FG16.2mm
The maximum working frequency: 100Hz
Protection class: IP67
It has the functions of polarity and short circuit protection.
Installation and use
Installation method
Pump stroke sensor:
Installed on the pump rod (Figure 3.2-2): Place the fixed clamp of sensor in the suitable
position, and adjust the fixed nut of sensor to make the sensing face of sensor nearly parallel
to the measured end. Adjust the positions of the sensing face of sensor and the sensing
surface of pump rod to make their distance within 32.4mm (8B06F) /16.2mm (8B06FG);
Installed on the belt pulley (Figure 3.2-3): Weld a 30x30mm iron sheet of right angle to
the belt pulley, with its end face nearly parallel to the end face of sensor. Adjust the fixed nut
of sensor to make the distance between iron sheet and end face of sensor within 32.4mm
(8B06) /16.2mm (8B06FG).
Attention:
Align the inductive end face of the sensor with either of the two ends of the pump rod. It is
forbidden to align it with the intermediate position of the pump rod; otherwise double
times of pump stroke will be measured. As the installing positions of sensors are
different, the pumping speed ratios are different, if it is installed on the pump rod, the
pumping speed ratio is 1:1; if it is installed on the belt pulley, the pumping speed ratio
can be obtained from the division of two parameters after querying the relative
parameters of the mud pump (or the pumping speed ratio is obtained through manually
measured pump strokes divided by the measured value of sensor), then input the
pumping speed ratio (For the input method, see software part)
53
Figure 3.2-2 Schematic diagram of installing pump stroke sensor on pump rod
Figure 3.2-3 Schematic diagram of installing pump stroke sensor on belt pulley
54
Figure 3.2-4 Schematic diagram of installing table speed sensor

Table speed sensor: weld a 30x30mm iron sheet of right angle to the cardan shaft of the
rotary table or shaft of the air sac clutch (Figure 3.2-4). Place the fixed clamp of sensor in the
suitable position with its end face nearly parallel to the end face of sensor. Adjust the fixed
nut of sensor to make the distance between iron sheet and end face of sensor within 32.4mm
(8B06) /16.2mm (8B06FG).
Attention:
When it is installed on the cardan shaft of the rotary table or shaft of the air sac clutch, the
rotary speed ratio can be obtained from the division of two parameters after querying the
relative parameters of the rotary table (or the rotary speed ratio is obtained through
manually measured rotations divided by the measured value of sensor), then input the
rotary speed ratio (For the input method, see software part).
Connection
The pump stroke sensor signal output line of CAN bus type is equipped with a four-core
aviation plug. Connect the four-core hole plug of the pump stroke/table speed sensor signal output
line to the four-core needle socket equipped in the 9N21 interface box and screw it up.
Pin definition of aviation connector: 1, signal (orange); 2, null; 3, +9VCD (red); 4, shielding
layer.
55

If there is no signal output when the pump stroke and table speed sensors are in the
normal status, first observe whether the indicator on the sensor is flashing. If the indicator
is always off or on, check the extension cable for any breakage or short circuit.
After making sure the extension cable is normal, test the working voltage of the sensor.
The corresponding voltage between pins 1 and 3 of the plug should be available.
If the working voltage is normal, place a metal object close to the end plane of the sensor.
The indicator should light up in this case and become off when taking the metal object
away. Otherwise, the sensor is damaged. There is no indicator on 8B06FG. Judgment can
be made by measuring its current changes or observing acquisition software.
If the sensor is not damaged, the distance between the sensor and the measured object
should be adjusted until the indicator is on and off normally.
If failures occur to the pump stroke and table speed sensors, it is not allowed to
disassemble or maintain them on site because they have been sealed completely when
leaving factory. Send them to the factory for repair.
Maintenance
Wiring should be made in strict compliance with the plug number or color code marked in
the manual. The direct current regulated power supply should be adopted, with the ripple
coefficient of the regulated power supply <3%.
Attention should be paid to that the metal filings or oil stained inductive sensing face with
metal filings should not be used, to avoid causing magnetic short circuit leading to
misoperation of the sensor. The installation point should avoid direct sunshine as much as
possible, to improve sensor reliability;
It should be used under the rated technical parameters.
Cables should be erected under the principles not to hinder the field operations of
operators on well site, uneasy to buck or damage, safety and reliability;
As the installation positions of sensor are different, the number of generated pulses is not
always equal to the number of pump strokes and rotary speed, and it can be solved
through the correction coefficient set by receiver.
XIX.3 SK-8Y21A hook weight pressure sensor

It is used for measuring the hook load (hang weight).
Overview
SK-8Y21A (measuring range: 0-6MPa) alloy film sensor is composed of ion beam sputtering
alloy film pressure sensor and signal modulation circuit, applicable to detect fluid pressure,
pressure difference and liquid level. It is made by adopting modern film device and etching
technology. It has features of unique technology, superior performance, high precision and
working stably in harsh environment for a long time.
The pressure/differential pressure of liquid medium can act on corrosion resistant stainless
elastic membrane, thus making it deformed. Fabricate alloy firm strain resistances forming
Wheatstone bridge on the membrane. The physical dimension and numerical value of resistance
will change with the deformation of resistance and the electrical bridge will output corresponding
56
signals. Electronic circuit will amplify the signal outputted by the electric bridge and convert it
into current signal of 4-20mA for output.
Measuring range: 0-1x105 or 0-80x106Pa
Output: two-wire system 4-20mA
Power supply: 24VDC 4V
Output limitation: when the sensor is over-voltage, the internal current limiter will limit
the output current below 25mA.
Temperature range: working temperature of sensitive element: -50-+125
Working temperature of the electronic components: -40-+85
Humidity range: 0-98% relatively humidity
Measuring range and zero point: internally adjustable, adjusting range: 3%
Performance indicators: accuracy (including linear, repeatability and the comprehensive
error of return difference) grade 0.2.
Linearity: 0.15% of the measuring range
Repeatability: 0.1% of the measuring range
Anti-hazard classification: ia II CT5
Explosive-proof certification number: GYB02139
Installation and wiring
Installation requirements
Select a good installation site convenient for maintenance and operation, and avoid harsh
environment causing damage to the sensor and affecting the measurement. Sensors of different
types are installed in different places on drilling site. The installation requirements are as follows:
There is enough space around, convenient for maintenance and correction;
Not directly exposed to strong heat source and sunlight.
Places not easy to be collided;
Convenient for wiring and installing.
Installation method
Connect the quick coupler of hook weight sensor assembly with the quick coupler of sensor
of derrick deadline anchor (Figure 3.3-1). If the couplers are not compatible, you can dismantle
the quick coupler of sensor of derrick deadline anchor and replace it with the one manufactured by
our company.
57
Figure 3.3-1 SK-8Y21A Schematic diagram of installing hook weight pressure sensor
Wiring
The transmission line should not pass through the conduit or open wire trough
together with other power lines and it should not pass through the neighborhood of
high power equipment either.
It is forbidden to use megohm megger to check insulation. As the sensor adopts
capacitance coupling grounding, only the insulation resistance instrument with the
voltage not more than 100V can be used to check insulation resistance.
Insert the three-core hole plug of the hook weight sensor signal output line (black)
into the three-core needle socket corresponding to 9N21 and screw it up.
Pin definition of aviation connector: 1, shielding layer; 2, +24VCD (red); 3, signal (orange).
Use and operation:
Checkup
It is unnecessary to adjust zero point and measuring range
after leaving factory. When checking up regularly,
if correction is necessary, demount the screws of wire holder,
and unscrew the outer casing for adjustment (Figure 3.3-2).
Figure 3.3-2
Adjustment
It is used to adjust the potentiometer of measuring range continuously, located on the
component side of the circuit and labeled with S, as shown in the right figure. The set screw on
the potentiometer can be rotated 25 cycles, and it will be ineffective when rotating more than 25
cycles.
58
Zero point adjustment

Potentiometer of zero point adjusting is located on the component side of the circuit, and
labeled with Z. The cycle for adjusting is 25.
Common trouble diagnosis and elimination
When the sensor has no signal output, first check extension cable for any breakage or short
circuit and the working voltage of sensor for any abnormality;
If you suspect that troubles occur to the pressure sensor, you can use the following method to
judge. Take down the pressure sensor, and connect it with piston pressure gauge. According
to the measuring range of the pressure sensor, measure the output value at zero position, 1/2
measuring range and full measuring range respectively. It is normal when the output current
signals at pin 2 and pin 3 are 4mA, 12mA and 20mA measured using multimeter mA current
shift, otherwise, the sensor fails;
When the pressure reading is incorrect, first check whether the hydraulic oil is enough. If
not , use manual pump to add oil.
Maintenance
Maintain the sensor regularly;
The sensor working in common environment should be checked up once a year.
The transmitter measuring high temperature, corrosive medium or working under vibrating
conditions should be checked up once half a year.
After the sensor working for five years, its insulation resistance should be checked up, and
the insulation resistance should be above 500M (Only the insulation resistance instrument
with the voltage not more than 100V can be used).
XIX.4 SK-8Y3XA series pressure sensor (stand pipe pressure and casing
pressure)
It is used for measuring pump pressure and casing pressure.
Overview
SK-8Y3XA no-cavity pressure sensor can be used to measure the pressure of viscous media.
Because the sensitive elements of the sensor adopt hard membrane structure, it has the functions
of impact resistance and abrasion resistance when contacting with the measured medium directly.
In addition, adopting ion beam deposition technique makes the sensor have features of high
precision and working stably in harsh environment for a long time.
Measuring range: 40MPa (8Y34A, standpipe pressure sensor), 60MPa (8Y36A, casing
pressure sensor)
Comprehensive accuracy: (nonlinear, lag , repeatability) 1% FS
59
Output: 4-20mA (two-wire system)

Power supply: 24VDC
Temperature influence: 0.04% FS/
Attention:
To measure the pressure of drilling fluid on drilling site, the sensor is equipped with two
kinds of connectors connecting with pressure source. One is welded type and the other is
threaded connection type. To prevent the sensitive elements from being stuck by viscous
material, it is required to make the pressure cell of sensor downwards as much as
possible while installing.
Standpipe pressure sensor (SK-8Y34A)
It is installed on the standpipe of the derrick, usually installed on the standpipe on the drilling
platform for connecting conveniently. Install some accessories selectively before installing the
sensor. The accessories of the sensor are shown in the following table. Users can install them
selectively according to the requirements of the drilling rig. Before installation, observe if there is
a compatible threaded hole (Figure 3.4-1 and Figure 3.4-2) on the standpipe so as to be convenient
for selecting the accessory.
Attachment: Table of accessories of standpipe pressure sensor and casing pressure sensor
No. Name and Quantity
specification
1 2" threaded pup 1
joint
2 Welded pipe 3
3 2" tee 1
4 M201.5 tee 1
5 Bulkhead 4
6 Combined 5
gasket of f 20
There is another 1 1/2" tee available for users to select according to rig requirements.
60
Figure 3.4-1 Schematic diagram of installing unthreaded hole of Sk-8Y34A standpipe pressure sensor
61
Figure 3.4-2 Schematic diagram of installing threaded hole of Sk-8Y34A standpipe pressure sensor
After the installation of an accessory mentioned above is finished, you should set the
combined gasket of 20 on the sensor and screw the sensor in the threaded hole of the above
accessory and tighten it. Insert the three-core hole plug of the casing pressure sensor signal output
line (black) into the three-core needle socket corresponding to 9N21 and screw it up.
Installation method of 2" threaded pup joint: After selecting compatible threaded hole on
the standpipe, clean the threaded hole first, and then wrap the screw thread of the pup
joint with pipe thread seal tape and screw the pup joint in the threaded hole of standpipe
and then tighten it with a pipe wrench.
Installation method of welded pipe: before installation, find a flat area on the standpipe,
cut a hole of 18 using gas-cutting method, then weld the welded pipe with standpipe
firmly by a professional welder.
Installation method of 2" tee: First dismount the pump pressure meter on the standpipe,
wrap the screw thread of the tee with pipe thread seal tape and screw the tee in the
threaded hole of standpipe and then tighten it with a pipe wrench; subsequently, wrap
the screw thread of the pump pressure gauge with pipe thread seal tape and screw the
pump pressure gauge in the threaded hole of the tee and then tighten it with a pipe
wrench.
Installation method of M201.5 tee: it is used when both drilling and logging need to
install sensors at the same time. It can be installed on the three accessories above-
mentioned by screwing the thread of the tee into its threaded hole.
Installation method of 11/2" tee is the same as that of 2" tee.
Casing pressure sensor (SK-8Y36A)
Generally, a standby mouthpiece is available near the casing pressure gauge of the choke
manifold, usually it is plugged with a bulkhead. To install the casing pressure sensor, you only
need to dismantle the bulkhead and then install the sensor. If there is no such a mouthpiece, you
should install an accessory selectively (the installation method of the accessory is the same as that
mentioned above). After the installation of an accessory mentioned above is finished, you should
set the combined gasket of 20 on the sensor and screw the sensor in the threaded hole of the
above accessory and tighten it. Insert the three-core hole plug of the casing pressure sensor signal
output line (black) into the three-core needle socket corresponding to 9N21 and screw it up.
Warning
As the sensor and its joint shall be subject to huge pressure when the drilling pump is
running, if welded joint is adopted for installation, professional welders are required.
After installation completes, a pressure test will be made according to the pressure value
of nominal full measuring range of different sensors.
62
XIX.5 SK-8N07G AC&DC electric torque sensor

It is used for measuring torque of rotary table, applicable to electric drilling rig. It is also
applicable to other occasions requiring non-contact current measurement.
Overview
This sensor is a current sensor composed of hall element, which outputs signals by adopting
three-wire single power supply (24VDC). Since adopting industrial grade elements and seal
structure, it can work in the open air all day long.
Measuring range: 0-1000A
Frequency response: 0-1000Hz
Measuring accuracy: 5%FS
Output signal: 4-20mA
Hole diameter: f 40mm Fig. 3.5-1 Appearance of SK-8N07G

sensor
The maximum current consumption: 60mA
Weight: 0.63kg
Installation
The appearance of the sensor is shown in Figure 3.5-1. Unfasten the screw of the measuring
loop, after wrapping the measured current conductor with flexible insulator such as plastic foam of
proper thickness, put it in the measuring loop and screw up. The measured conductor is fixed in
the middle of the measuring loop. The sensor should be installed in a safe area.
Connection
Three-wire CAN bus analog sensor signal output line is equipped with four-core aviation
plug, connected to the four-core aviation socket equipped in the 9N21 interface box (Figure 3.5-2).
The sensor adopts four-core shielding cable, and the shielding layer should be grounded at the
interface of the instrument.
Pin definition of aviation connector: 1, 0V (black); 2, +24VCD (red); 3, signal (orange); 4,
shielding layer.
63
Figure 3.5-2 Schematic diagram of installing SK-8N07G electric torque sensor

Daily maintenance and repair
The sensor adopts engineering plastics shell which has some strength but cant be fiercely
beat. If you find the sensor output signal is abnormal, you can first check whether the supply
voltage and the cable line are normal or not. If the sensor is still abnormal after eliminating
troubles caused by power supply and cable line, you can contact the sales department of our
company, or send it back to our company for repair.
Attention:
For AC variable frequency drilling rigs, the current intensity in the power cable doesnt
present linear increasing and decreasing with changes in torque, therefore, SK-8N07G
electric torque sensor cant measure torque of the rotary table of the variable frequency
drilling rig.
XIX.6 SK-8N01G rotary table torque sensor

It is used for measuring rotary table torque, applicable to mechanical drilling rigs whose
rotary table is fixed with terminal strands.
Overview
64
In the course of drilling, the working status of downhole tools and changes of formations can
be reflected correctly by using rotary table torque sensor to measure changes in driving torque of
the rotary table. Such changes as drill wear, cone bite or drop, drill stem blocked or broken,
hardness of formation will cause changes in driving torque of the rotary table. Therefore, it is
helpful to know downhole working status using the rotary table torque sensor to correctly measure
and display the rotary table torque. Once any accident is likely to occur, the corresponding
measures can be taken as soon as possible to avoid accident occurrence.
In the course of drilling, the drilling tool is driven by the rotary table to realize drilling. At the
same time, the drilling tool will generate an opposite torque on the rotary table with value equal to
and direction opposite to the driving torque, giving the rotary table a trend to rotate reversely.
There are many terminal strands around the rotary table to fix it. Therefore, the terminal strands
will be acted by a thrust, with value directly proportional to that of table torque, caused by the
reverse rotation of rotary table. Based on this mechanics theory, place a pressure transmitter
between the rotary table and the terminal strands. The pressure transmitter will convert the acting
force of terminal stands into oil pressure; then the table torque sensor will convert the oil pressure
signals transmitted by the pressure transmitter into electrical signals. The intensity of electrical
signal can reflect changes in driving torque of rotary table. Electrical signal is then transmitted to
the secondary instrument or computer interface to display and acquire information on driving
torque of the rotary table.
The composition of SK-8N01G rotary table torque sensor system is shown in Figure 3.6-1,
including pressure transmitter (1) four-way joint, (2) pressure sensor, (3) pressure gauge, (4) as
well as high pressure hose. The high pressure hose that needs to be dismantled frequently is
connected with the four-way joint through a quick coupler so as to be convenient for being
dismantled and assembled. The pressure oil outputted from the sensor will flow into the four-way
joint where an orifice plug (6) is installed to reduce the impact of inputted oil pressure.
65
Figure 3.6-1 Composition of SK-8N01G rotary table torque sensor system

The range of the input hydraulic signal: 0-1.6MPa
Film diameter of pressure transmitter: f 152mm
The maximum pressure limit: 24MPa

Load capacity: 50KN
The output sensitivity: 4-20mA/0-1.6MPa
Working temperature: -30 +80
Nonlinear error: 0.5%
Installation
To install the sensor, first select the terminal stand used for installing the pressure transmitter,
unscrew the terminal stand and set the pressure transmitter in it (Figure 3.6-2). There are two
adjustable back up blocks on the pressure transmitter. When they support on the terminal stand of
rotary table, you should make the central axis of pressure transmitter box approximately accordant
with the terminal stand axis as far much possible, and then press the pressure transmitter tightly
with the terminal stand (Figure 3.6-3). To make the pressure transmitter keep good contact with
both the terminal stand and the rotary table, it is necessary to set rubber gaskets taking effect of
resetting between the rotary table and all of other three terminal strands bearing the reactive torque
66
of the rotary table. Similarly, unscrew the terminal strand, set the rubber gasket, and screw the
three terminal strands with similar forces, and then connect the sensor, pipelines and four-way
joint. Fix the pressure gauge on the appropriate position of the derrick.
Figure 3.6-2 Schematic diagram of installing pressure transmitter and rubber gaskets
Figure 3.6-3 Schematic diagram of installing pressure transmitter and terminal strands
Attention:
To enhance the test accuracy, before installation, it is necessary to apply a coat of thread
lubricant used for drill pipe on the surface of the steel beam supporting the rotary table
to reduce the friction resistance between the rotary table and the steel beam surface.
It is necessary to prevent air from entering the oil system such as pressure transmitter,
high pressure hose and manometer.
Air must be vented once it enters the system. The operating procedures are: Unscrew the gas
relief screw (8) (Figure 3.6-1) on the pressure transmitter, dismantle the protective casing on the
oil injecting quick coupler (7) and connect the oil injecting quick coupler with the quick coupler
on the filling pump; at the same time, place all lines and elements in this oil circuit in positions
lower than the pressure transmitter, and then inject pressure oil from the oil injecting quick coupler
67
to vent the gas contained in the oil circuit out of the cavity of pressure transmitter box through the
gas relief screw on the pressure transmitter. When all air is vented and there is pressure oil leaked
out, stop injecting oil immediately, screw up the gas relief screw, dismantle the oil injecting line
and then connect the protective casing with the oil injecting quick coupler.
During drilling, when it is required to test the driving torque of rotary table, the pressure
transmitter must be pressed tightly by the terminal strands of rotary table. Before the rotary table
starts to drive, it is necessary to keep a pre-pressure of 0.3Mpa (you may observe the reading of
the manometer (4) connected with the pressure transmitter) inside the oil cavity of the pressure
transmitter. To prevent the pressure transmitter from loosing, fasten the wire rope (10) on the
handle of pressure transmitter to a suitable position on the terminal strand.
Connection
Two-wire CAN bus analog sensor signal output line is equipped with three-core aviation
plug. Insert the three-core hole plug of the rotary table torque sensor signal output line (black) into
the three-core needle socket corresponding to 9N21 and screw it up (Figure 3.6-4).
Figure 3.6-4 Schematic diagram of installing SK-8N01G rotary table torque sensor
If no signal is available in the operation, first check the reading of the pressure gauge. If
there is no reading in pressure gauge, check whether the terminal strand is loosening or
not. If the reading of the pressure gauge is normal, check the reading of the pressure
transmitter to further eliminate the system troubles.
Oil leakage of the oil system may also result in no signal or incorrect signal in torque. It
must be eliminated.
68
Maintenance
During drilling, when it is required to test the driving torque of rotary table, the pressure
transmitter must be pressed tightly by the terminal strands of rotary table. Before the
rotary table starts to drive, it is necessary to keep a pre-pressure of 0.3Mpa (you may
observe the reading of the manometer (4) connected with the pressure transmitter) inside
the oil cavity of the pressure transmitter.
To prevent the pressure transmitter from loosing, fasten the wire rope (10) on the handle
of pressure transmitter to a suitable position on the terminal strand.
The pressure oil should be filled frequently.
XIX.7 SK-8N05G terminal strand type rotary table torque sensor

It is used for measuring rotary table torque, applicable to mechanical drilling rigs whose
rotary table is fixed with terminal strands.
Overview
This sensor uses the special-structured barrel type resistance strain measurement sensor to
measure the twisting force of rotary table, thus calculating the table torque.
M =F
L
Where: F-force acting on sensor, L-lever of force (The vertical distance between the center of well
and installing point of sensor)
The sensor can output standard current signals of 4-20mA. It adopts two-wire system to
connect lines and has polarity protection and overcurrent protection functions. To meet the
requirements for being used in hostile open air environment of oilfield, the sensor adopts steel
wire cable and industrial circuit chip.
Measuring range: 0-100KN
Anti-overload capacity: 100%
Supply voltage: 24VDC
Output signal: 4-20mA
Measuring accuracy: 2%F.S
Temperature influence: 0.5%/10 (Full measuring range)
Range of working temperature: -40-+50
Mechanical installation
Hoist the rotary table, apply graphite oil between the rotary table and the longeron, and then
dismantle one of the terminal strands and replace it with this sensor and set a rubber gasket
between every two terminal strands. The difference between installation of this senor with that of
SK-8N01G torque sensor lies in that it only needs to dismantle one of terminal strands fixing the
rotary table and replace it with SK-8N05 terminal strand type table torque sensor here. After
setting rubber gaskets between the rotary table and three terminal strands, support each terminal
strand and the sensor tightly so that the sensor can bear certain prestress. Suspend the steel wire
69
cable and coupler of the sensor on the longeron or the derrick with lead wire (Figure 3.7-1 and
3.7-2).
Connection
Insert the three-core hole plug of the rotary table torque sensor signal output line (black) into
the three-core needle socket corresponding to 9N21 and screw it up.
To reduce electromagnetic interference, shielding cables should be used as the signal
transmission lines and their shielding layers must be connected soundly with the sensor enclosure
and the earth.
Figure 3.7-1 Schematic diagram of installing pressure transmitter and rubber gaskets
0~100KN
+
F 15~36VDC
100 _
mA
Figure 3.7-2
70
Figure 3.7-3 Schematic diagram of installing terminal strand type rotary table torque sensor
The sensor circuit has the functions of polarity and over-current protection. When the power
polarity of the circuit is reversed, the circuit will not be burnt out, but the output is zero. Therefore,
if the output current is zero, it is required to check whether the signal cable is misconnected or
disconnected, and polarity reversing can also be taken into consideration. If the output current is 2-
3mA or about 28mA, exert pressure on the head of sensor. If the output shows no response, the
sensor fails. You can contact our company or send the sensor to our company for repair.
Maintenance
Sensor bolt should be applied with a layer of grease and should not be washed with water;
Steel wire cable and joint part should not be pulled or twisted with force;
Store it in a dry and ventilated environment when it is not used and power on to check it
frequently;
Calibration of sensor: dismount the socket of the sensor (Figure 3.7-4), connect according
to Figure 3.7-2. When the force acting on sensor is zero, adjust zero potentiometer W105
so that the output current is 4MA0.05MA. Then exert force of 100KN, adjust full range
potentiometer W100 so that the output current is 20MA0.05MA. According to the
above-mentioned method, repeat the operation 1-2 times, and the calibration work can be
finished.
71
Figure 3.7-3 Schematic diagram of calibration
XIX.8 SK-8N02 stretching pulley type rotary table torque sensor

It is used for measuring table torque and applicable to mechanical rigs without terminal
strands on the rotary table and driving rotary table with chain case.
Overview
During drilling, the diesel engine, through a serials of driving gears, drives the drawworks
and the rotary table through driving chains; at the same time, the rotary table drives the drilling
tools, thus realizing drilling. The tightness of driving chains can correspond to the torque of rotary
table. When abnormity occurs to downhole drilling tools or the lithology of formation changes, the
torque of rotary table will change, thus influencing the variance of tensioning force of the chain.
Based on this theory, you can put a stretching pulley type table torque sensor beneath the drilling
chain. The sensor will convert the tensioning force of the chain into oil pressure; then a pressure
sensor will convert the outputted oil pressure signals into electrical signals. The intensity of
electrical signal can reflect changes in driving torque of rotary table. Electrical signal is then
transmitted to the secondary instrument or computer interface to display and acquire information
on driving torque of the rotary table, which is helpful to keep track of downhole dynamics.
The system composition of SK-8N02 stretching pulley type rotary table torque sensor is
shown in Figure 3.8-1, including pressure sensor, (1) high pressure hose, (2) three-way quick
coupler, (3) anchor plate, (4) spacing blot, (5) high pressure oil cylinder, (6) hanger bracket, (7)
stretching pulley, (8) set screw, (9) long and short backing plates and so on. In order to be
convenient for charging pressure oil, the pressure sensor and the high pressure hose of the
stretching pulley type table torque sensor are connected through a quick coupler so as to be
convenient for being dismantled and assembled.
72
7 8
9
6
5
4
1 2
3
10 11
12
Figure 3.8-1 Composition of stretching pulley type rotary table torque sensor system
The range of the output hydraulic signal: 0-6MPa
The outer diameter of stretching pulley: 305mm
Diameter of high pressure oil cylinder: 65mm
The minimum height of sensor: 355.3mm
Nonlinear error: 0.5%
The output signal: 4-20mA/0-6MPa (current)
Connection and installation
According to difference of drilling rigs, there are two modes for installing the stretching
pulley type table torque sensor. In both modes, the sensors are installed on the strained tight side
of the driving chain under stress . As shown in Figure 3.8-2.
Figure 3.8-2 Schematic diagram of installing stretching pulley rotary table torque sensor
Installation of the closed chain case
A great quantity of lubricating oil is available inside the closed chain case due to the
requirements of lubrication and dust prevention. Therefore, when installing the sensor, first drain
all the oil. Open the full-closed chain cover and install the stretching pulley type rotary table
torque sensor on the strained tight side of the driving chain under stress.
73
The direction of driving chain must conform to the steering wheel identification of the torque
sensor. Screw both of two spacing bolts to the lowest positions so that the high pressure hose of
the sensor can be connected with the manual filling pump (using rapid coupler) to inject oil into
the sensor. The stretching pulley type table torque sensor will ascend with the charging of
hydraulic oil. When the stretching pulley contacts the chain slightly, it is required to put straight
the anteroposterior and right-left position of sensor. After confirming that the position is correct,
weld both short and long backing plates on the anchor plate of the chain base. If finding the
stretching pulley is deviated after welding, you can unscrew four bolts on the anchor plate and
then adjust the position; or you can adjust the anteroposterior position of the stretching pulley by
using set screws on both sides of the hanger bracket to make the chain centralized.
After the position of sensor is confirmed to be correct again, fill the senor with oil
continuously. When the chain is tensioned to some degree, it is required to measure the tightness
of the chain. The method is to exert pressure of about 20 kilograms on the upper chain with hand
at the middle point of the center distance of the chain wheel, with its droop of about 20mm being
the best. Spin the spacing screw upwards until it contacts the hanger bracket and then lock the lock
nut tightly. The main function of the spacing screw is that when it is required to supplement oil
after oil leakage occurs in the hydraulic system, it is unnecessary for you to measure the tightness
of the chain again and you can stop charging oil just when feeling that the operation of filling
pump becomes heavier, which indicates that the stretching pulley has reached its original position,
to prevent the chain from being over tensioned. Since the pressure sensor and the filling pump are
to be connected with it during using, you must punch a hole of 27 on the chain cover and thread
the high pressure hose coupler through it with a round nut locked outside tightly; close the chain
cover, fill up chain lubricant, pull out the filling pump and connect the SK-8Y21A pressure sensor
assembly (with three-way quick coupler). Insert the three-core hole plug of the rotary table torque
sensor signal output line (black) into the three-core needle socket corresponding to 9N21 and
screw it up.
Installation of the semi-closed chain case
The installation method of semi-closed chain case is similar to that of closed chain case,
while it is unnecessary to punch a hole on the chain cover. After installation, you only need to
connect the pressure sensor assembly.
Use and operation
Once air enters the hydraulic systems such as high pressure oil cylinder and high
pressure hose, it is required to discharge the air. The operating procedures are: Unscrew the
brass gas relief screw on the high pressure cylinder of the sensor, dismantle the protective
casing on the oil injecting quick coupler (12) and connect the oil injecting quick coupler with
74
the quick coupler on the filling pump. At the same time, place all lines and elements in this
hydraulic system in positions lower than the high pressure cylinder of the sensor, and then
inject hydraulic oil to vent the air contained in the oil circuit through the gas relief screw on
the high pressure cylinder. When all air is vented and there is pressure oil leaked out, stop
injecting oil immediately, screw up the gas relief screw, dismantle the oil injecting line and
then connect the protective casing with the oil injecting quick coupler.
Attention:
The direction of driving chain must conform to the steering wheel identification of the
torque sensor;
The senor should be installed on the strained tight side of the driving chain; otherwise,
the change trend of the torque cant be induced;
It is necessary to prevent air from entering the oil system such as pressure transmitter,
high pressure hose and manometer.

If no signal is found in the operation, first check whether the chain is tensioned. If the
tension of the chain is normal, check the reading of the pressure transmitter to further
eliminate the system troubles.
Oil leakage of the hydraulic system may also result in no signal or incorrect signal in
torque. It must be eliminated.
Maintenance
When the stretching pulley fails to operate due to abrasion, change the parts in time to
keep the system correct and reliable.
The hydraulic oil should be filled up frequently. The oil-filling quick coupler can be
used while filling up oil, and it is unnecessary to dismount the pressure sensor assembly.
XIX.9 SK-8C05/8C05L ultrasonic liquid-level sensor

It is used for measuring volume of the drilling fluid tank.
Overview
It is a kind of ultrasonic liquid level sensor combining the sensing technique and electrical
signals together. It is used to measure the liquid level in the open or sealed container.
The sensor is equipped with ultrasonic sensor and temperature sensing elements. The sensor
can emit a series of ultrasonic pulse by the probe; the ultrasonic pulse will return and be received
by the sensor after encountering liquid level. The filter in the sensor can distinguish the true echo
returned from the liquid level between various kinds of false echoes from noise of acoustic wave
and electric wave and noise of rotation of agitator paddles. After being compensated, the time
spent from the impulse wave is emitting to the liquid level until it returns to the sensor will be
75
converted into displayable distance and current for output.

Power supply: 24VDC, 0.1mA wave

Signal current: 4-20mA
Measuring range (liquid): 0.25-5m (0.8-
16.4ft)
Bean angle of directional wave: 10(-3dB)
Storage: EEPROM, no battery required.
Procedure operation: only requiring two
keys
Working temperature: continuous work: -40-
+60 (-40-+140F)
Sensor: work under 110(230F) for 30min (steam) In the case of metal mounting rack:
Fig. 3.9-1 Appearance of SK-8C05L ultrasonic
-20(-4F) liquid level sensor
Temperature compensation: beyond operation range, internal compensation

Display: Liquid crystal display
Three 9 mm (0.35) digital displays for displaying readings of distance between
sensing surface and liquid level
Multiple drawings represent different operation status
The current output range: 4-20mA
Gain: direct or inverse ratio
Accuracy: 0.25%
Resolution: 3mm(0.125)
Load: At most 600 (24VDC )
Pressure (sealed tank): 200Kpa (2bara or 30psi)
Structure composition: the probe is combined with signal processing circuit.
Material of sensor shell: TEFZEI;
Shell installation: screw 2NPT, 2BSP or PEI; flange adapter can be selected.
Signal processing circuit
Material: PVC;
Accessory: foldable cover, with two cable inlets of f 22mm that can be opened on both
sides.
Weight: 1.5kg
Installation
The ultrasonic liquid level sensor can be installed on the mud tank whose liquid level is
required to be monitored with two installation modes: gripping type and welding type (Figures
76
3.9-2 and 3.9-3). SK-8C05 ultrasonic liquid level sensor (gripping type) is installed on the
mounting rack or pipe clamp of the sensor. For SK-8C05 ultrasonic liquid level sensor (welding
type), the welding block on the bottom of the mounting rack is welded to the suitable position. The
installation methods of SK-8C05L and 8C05 ultrasonic liquid level sensors are different, while
others of them are the same.
Installation of gripping type sensor:
Manufacture certain amount of angle irons (as per amount of sensors to be installed) first,
whose specification can be customized. Select the mud tank on which a sensor is to be installed.
The installation position should be selected according to principle that not to influence the
pedestrians. Weld one end of an angle iron on the tank surface firmly and then clamp the sensor
installation carrier on the angle iron and tighten it; fix the gripping type sensor on the sensor
installation carrier. Before tightening it, place the sensor to make its bottom sensing face
perpendicular to the tank surface, and then gas-cut a square hole with opening radius at least
greater than the distance of Htan5 (where H is the vertical distance between the probe and the
tank surface, and tan5 is the tangent value of 5 degree) on the tank surface corresponding to the
sensing face of the sensor. Then put straight the sensing face so that the sensing face of the sensor
is at least 25cm away from the highest liquid level or tank surface and tighten the retaining clip.
Insert the three-core hole plug of the ultrasonic liquid-level sensor signal output line (black) into
77
Figure 3.9-2 Schematic diagram of installing gripping type sensor

Installation of welding type sensor
Weld the welding block on the bottom of the sensor installation carrier to the mud tank
surface directly and gas-cut a square hole with opening radius at least greater than the distance of
Htan5 (where H is the vertical distance between the probe and the tank surface, and tan5 is the
tangent value of 5 degree) on the tank surface corresponding to the sensing face of the sensor.
Insert the three-core hole plug of the ultrasonic liquid-level sensor signal output line (black) into
Pin definition of aviation plug: 1, shielding layer; 2, +24VCD (red); 3, signal (orange).
Attention:
There should be no obstacles (such as packing opening, pipeline, weld junction and
ladder border) between the sensing face of the sensor and the tank bottom, and the
sensor is forbidden from contacting the tank wall. That's to say that the sensing face of
the sensor should be capable of shooting at the tank bottom directly; otherwise the
measurement accuracy will be influenced.
78
Figure 3.9-3 Schematic diagram of installing welding type sensor

Operation and use
Startup
Install sensor correctly. Power on and the sensor begins to display. Under default operation
mode, readings of the distance from sensor surface to liquid level are displayed in the specified
unit. The default status display is different from graphic display. View the operation status.
Checkup
Current output checkup is direct ratio gain to the liquid level or reverse ratio gain to the liquid
level (Figure 3.9-4). 4mA and 20mA liquid levels can be checked up in any direction. Check up by
reference method (Figure 3.9-5)
The liquid level (or target) in the tank is located in the corresponding distance of expected
checkup value and press corresponding 4 or 20 keys. The observation sequence saved in the
sensor will be displayed automatically. Now press the press the key again (the same key as that of
last time) to finish the checkup. After observing and checkup for 6s, the sensor automatically
79
restores to the operation mode.

The checkup value starts to account from the probe head plane of sensor in the specified unit.
Figure 3.9-4
Figure 3.9-5 Figure 3.9-6
80
Figure 3.9-7 Figure 3.9-8 Settings of 4mA and 20mA
Check up the speed of bypass measuring response

In the graphic display area, an instruction to observe the operating status of sensor is
provided for users. By observing the graph, it helps users look up in time and find the optimal
position to complete the operation of sensor (Figure 3.9-6).
Changes in Logo indicate different operation states. If "? logo appears following waiting,
it represent LOE/FAULT. When an effective echo is received again, there will appear Good.
For details, refer to the section on troubles elimination.
Adjustment:
Adjustment operation (Figure 3.9-7): press 4 and 20 keys at the same time until the
operation to be adjusted appears. The observation sequence saved in the sensor will appear
automatically and then press 4 key or 20 key to change its value. After changing or observing,
the operation will automatically restore to the operation mode.
Checkup by rolling method (Figure 3.9-8)
In the places where the distance from the liquid level to reference surface cannot be given,
this method is used. In this method, checkup values of 4 and 20mA can be selected and this
method is also used to arrange positions of outgoing liquid obtained by the reference method.
81
If it is required to change the saved checkup value, first adjust the display to C4 or C20
display status, press 20 key to gradually increase the checkup value and press 4 key to
gradually decrease it. When the displayed checkup value rolls to the required value, stop pressing
the key. After displaying for 6s, it will automatically restore to the operation mode. In the course
of checkup, keep pressing the key and the display will roll quickly; release the key when reaching
the required value.
Blind area (Figure 3.9-9)
The blind area is generally used to ignore the area in front of sensor, here various false
echoes will interfere in the true echoes and accordingly affect the true vale. The blind area
starts to count outwards from the sensing surface and the minimum value of blind area is
0.25m (0.82ft) but this value may increase due to the expansion of blind area.
To change the saved value of blind area, first adjust the display to bL display status,
press 20 key and the value of blind area will increase; press 4 key and the value of blind
area will decrease. When the displayed checkup value rolls to the required value, stop
pressing the key. About 6s later, the display restores to operation mode automatically.
Figure 3.9-9 Blind area setting

Speed of response (Figure 3.9-10)
The speed regulation of response permits users to concentratedly set a group of operation
parameters.
Measuring response: constrain the ability of sensor to change the speed with the liquid level.
If the sensor measurement cannot change the speed with the liquid level, adjust the setting from
1 to 2 and if it still cannot change the speed with the liquid level, adjust the setting to 3 and
avoid using it due to the fact this selection is too fast.
82
Interference resolution of stirrer: distinguish the interference between stirrer blades and the
surface of container material (or target) in the course of rotating.
Filter: distinguish the interference between the false echo from optical and acoustic noises
and the surface of container material (or target).
Failure protection clock: create a waiting stage starting from the echo loss or misoperation
status until the default of failure protection time.
Table 3.9-1
Speed of Measuring Identify Filter Failure protection
response response interference clock
1* 1m/min On On 10min
(3.3ft/min)
2 5m/min On On 3min
(499.87cm/min)
3 Response Off Off 3min
immediately
4 0.03m/min On On 10min
(0.1ft/min)
* Original settings.
To change the speed of response, adjust to SP display status, press 20 key and scroll
forwards to display options (1-2-3); press 4 key and scroll backwards to display options (3-2-1).
When the target option is displayed, stop pressing and it automatically returns to the operation
mode after displaying for 6s.
Figure 3.9-10 Settings of response speed

Failure protection (Table 3.9-2)
When echo loss or misoperation, there appears ? icon after carrying out a waiting stage
and the system immediately carries out one of failure protection defaults.
83
Table 3.9-2
Failure Default P i Reading value
protection MA MA
FLS
1* Saturation 22 4 HOLD
2 Null 4 22 HOLD
3 HOLD HOLD HOLD HOLD
P-Direct ratio gain
i-Inverse ratio gain
* Original settings.
To change the failure protection default, first adjust the display to FLS display status, press
20 key and scroll forwards to display options (1-2-3); press 4 key and scroll backwards to
display options (3-2-1). When the target option is displayed, stop pressing and it automatically
restores to the operation mode after displaying for 6s.
Figure 3.9-11 Settings of failure protection
Unit (Figure 3.9-11)

The following units can be selected as the unit of measuring reading: *1-meter (original
setting), 2- foot (ft);
These units are also applied in the blind area and alarm adjustment.
To change the unit, first adjust the display to Un display status, press 20 key and scroll
forwards to display options (1-2); press 4 key and scroll backwards to display options (2-1).
When the target option is displayed, stop pressing and it automatically returns to the operation
mode after displaying for 6s.
84
Figure 3.9-12 Unit setting

Measuring interval
The sensor generates a series of ultrasonic pulses from the sensor to the actual measuring
distance. The measuring interval depends on effective current of closed circuit and it increases
with the decrease in the current of closed circuit.
Elimination of common troubles
Appear
Showing that the echo is incorrect or the sensor is waiting for an effective echo before refreshing
the measurement. Causes:
The measured material or target contacts the sensor surface.
The sensor is too close to the packing opening;
The sensor is not perpendicular to the liquid level;
The liquid level changes too quickly;
The measurement is out of range.
There is foam on the liquid surface;
The vibration amplitude of the fixed support is large.
Liquid level enters blind area.
Appear
LOE/FAULT
View the time adjustment/response speed of the waiting stage.
Maintenance
It is required to keep the sensor clean and avoid water vapor and oil sludge entering the
operation panel. It is usually installed in the sealed protective case and it is not exposed
to outside while working. The protective case can be opened only when checking up and
adjusting.
The sensor should be installed about 0.25m above the maximum liquid level measured.
Otherwise, the liquid will immerse the sensor, which will cause damage to the sensor.
85
The signal cable inlet of sensor should be sealed to avoid water and oil sludge.
Procedures for calibrating ultrasonic sensor:
1) Enter the automatic operation mode after powering on;
2) Press 20mA20 and 4mA 4 touch keys at the same time;
3) C4 is displayed, showing 4mA calibration initialization;
4) Wait for 3s to display the saved value and then press 20mA 20 or 4mA 4 , move upwards or
downwards to select the value you want (=height of mud pit + distance from end surface of
sensor top of mud pit) and release the key;
5) Enter the automatic operation mode after waiting for 6s;
6) Continuously press 20mA20 and 4mA 4 keys twice at the same time until the display
sequence is C4-C20 and release the keys;
7) C20 is displayed, showing 20mA calibration initialization;
8) Wait for display of the saved value and then press 20mA 20 and 4mA 4 , move upwards or
downwards to select the value you want (=distance from end surface of sensor top of mud
pit) and release the keys;
9) Repeat the fifth step;
10) Continuously press 20mA20 and 4mA 4 keys three times at the same time until the display
sequence is C4 C20 bL and release the keys;
11) bL is displayed, showing the initialization calibration of the value of blind area;
12) Repeat the fourth step, but select the required value > 25mm;
14) Continuously press 20mA20 and 4mA 4 keys four times at the same time until the display
sequence is C4C20bLSP and release the keys;
15) SP is displayed, showing the calibration initialization of speed of response;
16) Repeat the fourth step, but generally select the required value, which is 2.
18) Continuously press 20mA20 and 4mA 4 keys five times at the same time until the display
sequence is C4C20bLSPFLS and release the keys.
19) FLS is displayed, showing failure protection calibration initialization.
20) Repeat the fourth step and selected the required value, generally 1 or 2.
22) Continuously press 20mA20 and 4mA 4 keys six times at the same time until the display
sequence is C4C20bLSPFLSFSE and release the keys (This step can be skipped)
23) Repeat the fourth step and initialize the calibration of failure protection lasting time.
24) Repeat the fifth step and set the value you want (select any value in the range of 0-15)
25) Continuously press 20mA20 and 4mA 4 keys seven times at the same time until the display
sequence is C4C20bLSPFLSFSEUN and release the keys;
26) UN is displayed, representing unit setup;
27) Repeat the fourth step and select the needed unit according to requirements;
86

Through a series of steps above, calibration operations of ultrasonic sensor have been
accomplished.
Note:
C4 stands for 4mA.
C20 stands for 20mA.
BL represents blind area and generally it is set as >25cm.
SP: speed of response refers to the feedback speed of reflected wave to the emitted
wave, with four options in total available. In general, it is set to option 2 (having the
function to identify the interference of stirrer.).
FLS: failure protection: in the case of echo loss or misoperation, three options are
available for the output mode and any one is selected.
FSE: failure protection lasting time. Options of (0-15 minutes) are available and any one
can be selected.
UN: unit selection: two options are available. 1 is metric system and 2 is English system.
Figure 3.9-13 Installation position of ultrasonic sensor
XIX.10 SK-8C06G liquid level sensor

It is used for measuring volume of the drilling fluid tank.
Overview
SK-8C06AG sensor uses an annular magnetic floating ball. The floating ball can ascend and
descend with liquid level, which causes the dry reed switch in corresponding position to close,
thus converting the liquid level into the corresponding resistance signals. Then the resistance
signals can be converted into standard two-wire system signal of 4-20mA through transducer
module for output.
87
The mechanical structure adopts stainless material, thus being capable of working all day long in
open air. The working temperature range is -40-+85. It is
mainly applicable to liquid level measuring in industries such as
oil field, environmental protection, chemical, power and
papermaking and so on. The explosion proof type can be used in
the flammable and explosive places. For operating principle of
sensor, refer to Figure 3.10-1.
There is a group of dry reed tubes and precision resistance
installed inside the test tube of sensor. When magnetic floating
ball outside the tube ascends and descends with the liquid level,
the dry reed tubes at liquid level inside the test tube will be
powered on in sequence to make the resistance value of sensor
change. The converting circuit inside the junction box will
convert the resistance value into current for output.
Main technical parameters
Measuring range: 300-2000mm (4m can be achieved
according to requirements)
Accuracy: 1% FS 25
Power supply: 24VDC, 4-20mA two-wire 3.10-1 Schematic diagram of senor
operating
system
Shell protection: IP65
Range of working temperature: -40-+85
Explosion-proof symbol: flameproof type: dII
BT4 (intrinsic safety ib II CT4)
Explosive-proof certification number:
GYB99421
Installation
Weld the fixed support of sensor to the tank surface
first, and then gas-cut a square hole a little bigger than the
floating ball on the tank surface; put the sensor together
with the floating ball into the mud tank and fix the sensor
with the fixed support. Insert the three-core hole plug of the
liquid level sensor signal output line (black) into the three-
core needle socket corresponding to 9N21 and screw it up
(Figure 3.10-2).
Pin definition of aviation plug: pin 1, shielding layer;
pin 2, +24VCD (red); pin 3, signal (orange).
Adjustment of zero point and full range
3.10-2 Schematic diagram of installing sensor
Connect the current meter in series to the output
3
loop, and put the floating ball at the lowest point to
adjust the zero potentiometer so that the reading of the current meter is 4mA0.02. Put the floating
ball at the highest position to adjust the full range potentiometer. To make the reading of the
current meter is 200.02mA and repeat the operation once again. The set screw is under the
nameplate, marked with Z.
88
3 Maintenance
When the circuit in the test tube is damaged, it can be judged whether that printed board fails
by measuring resistance. The total resistance of the board is 2000. If the resistance is very
small or very large, it indicates that the board fails. And it can be solved through replacing the
printed board. If something is wrong with the transmitter, it can be solved through replacing
the module type of transmitter.
If the liquid level sensor is used in mud tank of oil field, it is required to wash the measuring
rod and floating ball frequently and avoid the mud caking on it to affect the liquid measuring.
Since there is a minisize dry reed switch enclosed with glass in the liquid level measurement
tube of this sensor, it is required to handle it gently. Throwing and knocking sensors is
strongly forbidden. Anti-vibration measures should be taken in the course of transportation,
and it is suggested to put the sensor in the original packing box.
Attention:
Since there is a minisize dry reed switch enclosed with glass in the liquid level
measurement tube of this sensor, it is required to handle it gently. Throwing and
knocking sensors is strongly forbidden.
XIX.11 SK-8D08 (digital type) electrical conductivity sensor

This sensor is used to measure the electrical conductivity of drilling fluid.
Overview
SK-8D08 digital type electrical conductivity sensor is mainly used to measure the electrical
conductivity of mud.
This sensor is characterized by being capable of reading electrical conductivity values from
the display screen directly and having 4-20mA analog signal output of 0-300ms/cm. It is
convenient for carrying out calibrating operation.
This product can be used together with SK series CAN bus instrument and explosion-proof
mud logging unit. And it can also be used independently.
Main specs and technical parameters
Working voltage and output signal: working voltage: +24VDC; output signal: 4-
20mA (two-wire system)
Measuring range: 0-300ms/cm
Measuring accuracy: 1FS
Temperature of the measured medium: 0-+80
Temperature influence: 0.03FS/
Explosion symbol: Ex ia IICT5
Operating principle and main structure of product
This sensor can emit alternate current signals with constant amplitude and frequency to the
primary coil of annular probe. The secondary coil of liquid probe aiming at different electrical
conductivity will receive the cofrequency signals with corresponding amplitude and obtain
89
corresponding voltage signals after processing of subsequent circuit. At the same time, take the
voltage signal corresponding to the real-time temperature. Carry out functional operation of these
two parameters to get the real-time electrical conductivity value that is compensated to 25 .
Display this value and convert it into 4-20mA signals for output.
Figure 3.11-1 Structure diagram

As shown in Figure 3.11-1, the left diagram is the front view of SK-8D08 digital type
electrical conductivity sensor and the right diagram is the back view of transmitter of SK-8D08
digital type electrical conductivity sensor.
The probe passes through the input port of transmitter and inserts in JP3 position on the SK-
8D08-POWER board through MSTB V socket connector. Specific connections are as follows.
Pin 1 of MSTBV is connected to the white wire of the probe (emit);
Pin 2 is connected to the black wire of the probe (emit);
Pin 3 is connected to the shielding wire of the probe;
Pin 4 is connected to the shielding wire of the probe (receive);
Pin 5 is connected to the red wire of the probe (receive);
Pin 6 is connected to the blue wire of the probe (thermistor);
Pin 7 is connected to the brown wire of the probe (thermistor);
YD20K3ZP aviation plug passes through the output port of transmitter and connects to the
SIGNAL junction block. The specific connections are as follows:
SIGNAL+ is connected to pin 2 of aviation plug (red wire) (+24VDC);
SIGNAL+ is connected to pin 3 of aviation plug (orange wire) (4-20mA output).
Calibration
Statement
All SK-8D08 digital type electrical conductivity sensors have been calibrated following strict
procedures before leaving factory. Under the condition that the test devices meet the requirements,
90
if users have further demands for the measuring accuracy, they can calibrate strictly according to
this chapter.
Connection
Pin 2 of three-core hole aviation socket is connected to +24VDC and pin 3 is connected to the
power supply through 250 resistance.
Remarks
Parameter adjusting and inspecting (calibration) of devices must be carried out in the
laboratory environment. Open the cover after power off.
To facilitate explanation, is named key 1, key 2 and key 3.
Before calibration, ensure the probe is connected to the transmitter correctly and +24V power
supply works normally.
During calibration, if the time interval between key strokes is more than 15s, the system will
exit calibration automatically and display the real-time electrical conductivity value.
V-2.0 is the cover of calibration menu. After returning to display V-2.0 when finishing a
calibration, key 3 can be pressed for a short moment to carry out other calibrating
operations.
4mA calibration
4mA calibration and 20mA calibration introduced below are to ensure the precision of
DA conversion. A multimeter displaying over 4.5 digits is needed to carry out this operation.
Select DC current shift of the multimeter, and open the rear cover of the transmitter
of SK-8D08 digital type electrical conductivity sensor. The red detector of
multimeter is connected to Test+, and the black one is connected to TEST-.
Press key 1 for 3s until V-2.0 is displayed.
Press "key 3 for a short moment until 4mA is displayed.
Press key 1 for a short moment, the DA converting data corresponding to the
current output 4mA (types such as d 655) is displayed.
If 4.00mA is displayed in the multimeter, jump to step 8.
Press key 2 for a short moment, the displayed data will flicker by the digit order;
press key 3 for a short moment, the flickering data will overturn from 0 to 9.
The multimeter will display 4.00mA through modifying the data displayed in the
screen.
Press key 1 for a short moment, the sensor will store the result of calibration and
V-2.0 will be displayed.
Press key 1 for a short moment to exit calibration, and the real-time electrical
conductivity value will be displayed.
20mA calibration
91
Press "key 3 for a short moment until 20mA is displayed.
Press key 1 for a short moment, the DA converting data corresponding to the
current output 20mA (types such as E3277) is displayed.
If 20.00mA is displayed in the multimeter, jump to step 8.
Press key 2 for a short moment, the displayed data will flicker by the digit order;
press key 3 for a short moment, the flickering data will overturn from 0 to 9.
The multimeter will display 20.00mA through modifying the data displayed in the
screen.
Press key 1 for a short moment, the sensor will store the result of calibration and
V-2.0 will be displayed.
Read the probe constant J
To calculate the equivalent resistance, it is required to read the value of probe constant J.
Press "key 3 for a short moment until rd_J (read J) is displayed.
Press key 1 for a short moment, the probe constant J of the current system (types
such as G405) will be displayed.
Press "key 1 for a short moment until V-2.0 is displayed.
Inspection of calibration effect
To inspect the calibration effect conveniently, SK-8D08 adds a function of inspection using
resistance box to simulate mud environment. This operation only needs a resistance box with its
accuracy being 0.1% and a multimeter displaying over 4.5 digits.
The value of probe constant J of this sensor will be obtained through read the probe
constant J operation.
Calculate the equivalent resistance corresponding to 37.5ms/c, 75ms/c, 150ms/c,
225ms/c and 300ms/cm through formula (J/C) 4. (For example: the value of
probe J is 4050-3/cm obtained through read the probe constant J operation;
calculate the equivalent resistance: (405/300) 4 =5.4 corresponding to
300ms/cm)
92
The resistance box is put through the external ring of the probe through conductor,
and the conductor winds two cycles.
Press "key 3 for a short moment until simul (simulation) is displayed.
Press key1 for a short moment and the real-time electrical conductivity value
(unit: ms/cm; type: F 300.0) will be displayed.
Change the resistance value of the resistance box, and the electrical conductivity
and the displayed data on the screen will change. The specific relationship is given
in Table 3.11-1.
Table 3.11-1
Resistance value of Electrical conductivity (unit: Current value (unit: mA)
resistance box (unit: ms/cm)
)
5.40 300.003 20.000.16
7.20 225.003 16.000.16
10.80 150.003 12.000.16
21.60 75.003 8.000.16
43.20 37.503 6.000.16
Disconnect 0.00 4
If you are not satisfied with the inspection results, you can carry out accurate
calibration according to the relative description of calibration again.
Press "key 1 for a short moment until V-2.0 is displayed.
Take down the multimeter, and cover the back cover.
Installation
Weld the fixed support of sensor to the corresponding tank surface first, and then gas-cut
a square hole a little bigger than the sensor probe on the tank surface; put the lower part
of the sensor into the mud tank completely and fix the sensor with the fixed support;
During installation, the pole should be lowered vertically. The distance between the
liquid level of mud and the probe should be 5cm at least and that between the probe and
the mud ditch should be maintained at least 5cm;
Fix the CAN bus node near the sensor and insert the 3-core hole plug of the signal
93
output line (black) of electrical conductivity sensor into the 3-core needle socket
corresponding to 9N21 and screw it up. Figure 3.11-2 is the result after installation.
Pin definition of aviation plug: pin 1, shielding layer; pin 2, +24VCD (red); pin 3, signal (orange).
Use
After being installed on proper positions, they can be powered on to work;
Since the probe constant J will change due to abrasion of probe or probe being covered
with mud during use, the measurement accuracy can be influenced. Therefore, it is
required to clean the probe carefully and recalibrate the probe constant J regularly
(generally once 5 weeks). Once the probe constant J is calibrated, it is required to read
and record the value of J of current system. When the cumulative deviation of value of J
exceeds 1.00, to ensure the measurement accuracy, please replace the probe and
recalibrate it before bringing it into use;
If the relatively low on-site temperature causes the screen display ambiguous, you can
open the front cover of the transducer carefully after power off and adjust the
potentiometer W1 behind the display panel to make the display vivid.
Remarks
The body of transmitter is made of aluminum alloy but it may be corroded to some
extent if it is used for long time due to the fact that the water quality in well site is
alkaline. It is suggested to enhance external safeguard procedures to prolong its life and
improve its reliability.
Erect cables under the principles not to hinder the field operations of operators in well
site, uneasy to buck or damage, safety and reliability.
When installing and using, users shall comply with requirements in this manual and in
the service manual of safety barrier and related regulations as well in GB3836.15-2000
Electrical Apparatus for Explosive Gas Atmospheres Part15: Electric Installation in
Hazardous Areas (other than coal mines) and GB50058-1992 Code for Design of
Electric Installations within Explosion and Fire Hazard Atmospheres.
Common troubles and elimination methods
Failures Causes and elimination methods
OT_CR is displayed There may be two causes resulting in wrong display: the
temperature of mud exceeds the applicable temperature
of SK-8D08 conductivity senor; the mud conductivity is
beyond the range for measuring conductivity of SK-
8D08 conductivity senor.
The mud temperature suitable for measurement of SK-
8D08 conductivity senor is 10-80.
The mud conductivity suitable for measurement of SK-
8D08 conductivity senor shall not exceed 300ms/cm.
After R_J_C or A_J_C is The cause resulting in wrong display is that the
displayed, J calibration cant be conductivity value of the standard sample mud is too
carried out by pressing key 1. small.
The prerequisite for J calibration is that the conductivity
value of standard sample should be more than 10ms/cm.
The display of conductivity is Install the sensor to a place far away from interference.
94
unstable.
The display of conductivity is The installation of sensor is incorrect or unsuitable.
incorrect. The calibration is incorrect. Calibrate it again.
Others Please consult our company.
Attention:
Pollutants and mud crusts on the probe will influence the accuracy of measurement.
Therefore, after each use, it is required to flush the adherent mud away immediately. It is
not allowed to use a probe with dried mud.
When more than 2 SK-8D08 digital electrical conductivity sensors are installed on the same
mud ditch simultaneously, you should ensure that their probe levels are in the same line and the
distance between them is at least 5cm. If the relatively low on-site temperature causes the screen
display ambiguous, you can open the front cover of the transducer carefully after power off and
adjust the potentiometer W1 behind the display panel to make the display vivid. Since the probe
constant J will change due to abrasion of probe or probe being covered with mud during use, the
measurement accuracy can be influenced. Therefore, it is required to clean the probe carefully and
recalibrate the probe constant J regularly (generally once 5 weeks). Once the probe constant J is
calibrated, it is required to read and record the value of J of current system. When cumulative
deviation of value of J exceeds 1.00, to ensure the measurement accuracy, please replace the probe
and recalibrate it before bringing it into use.
Figure 3.11-3 Schematic diagram of installing double electrical conductivity probes

XIX.12 SK-8D03/8D04 electrical conductivity sensor
This sensor is used to measure the electrical conductivity of drilling fluid.
Overview
SK-8D03/8D04 electrical conductivity sensor adopts two toroidal coils to constitute the
primary coil and the secondary coil. The primary coil and the secondary coil are in the same axis
95
line. Their shells are enclosed with insulating materials resistant to high temperature, acid and
caustic and abrasion. The probe of sensor is immersed in the drilling fluid. The AC signals of
20KHZ transmitted in the primary coil will generate induced current in the drilling fluid that
presents closed status. The induced current generated through drilling fluid will be induced to the
secondary coil of the sensor. The magnitude of signal received by the secondary coil is directly
proportional to the conducting power (i.e. electrical conductivity) of drilling fluid. There is an
incorporated temperature sensor (thermistor) inside the sensor, which is used to monitor the
temperature of drilling fluid, correct the electrical conductivity at measured temperature based on
temperature and compensate it to the electrical conductivity of this drilling fluid at 25 . The
electrical conductivity transmitter will reshape, magnify and process the sensor signals and output
standard DC current signals of 4-20mA corresponding to the electrical conductivity.
Using object: liquid
Measuring range (linear measuring): 0-25ms/cm or 0-50ms/cm can be selected
Output range: 4-20mADC
Power supply 24VDC
Temperature range: working temperature of sensor -30-+70
Humidity range: relatively humidity < 90%
Response time: the response time will be not more than 1s
Measuring accuracy: 1% of full measuring range
Linearity: 1% of full measuring range
Anti-hazard classification: dib II BT4
Installation
96
Figure 3.12-1
Connection of transmitting sensor and the outside (take down the cover of the transmitter and
connect according to Figure 3.12-1)
Connection of transmitter and probe
The probe of sensor is connected to the transmitter using seven-core cable. Label, color and
function are as follows.
Black;
The white line is the outgoing line of the primary coil;
The bare copper wire is shield line;
Red;
The bare copper wire is the outgoing line of the secondary coil;
Brown;
The blue line is the outgoing line of the thermistor.
SK-8D03 and SK-8D04 electrical conductivity sensors can be installed conveniently after
being made as integrated devices. First weld
the fixed support of sensor to the
corresponding tank surface, and then gas-cut a
square hole a little bigger than the sensor probe
on the tank surface; put the lower part of the
sensor into the mud tank completely and fix
Fig. 3.12-2 Schematic diagram of
the sensor with the fixed support. During installing sensor
installation, the pole should be lowered
vertically. The distance between the liquid
level of mud and the probe should be 5cm at
least and that between the probe and the mud
ditch should be maintained at least 5cm. Insert
the three-core hole plug of the casing pressure
97
sensor signal output line (black) into the three-core needle socket corresponding to 9N21 and
screw it up (Figure 3.12-2).
Pin definition of aviation plug: pin 1, shielding layer; pin 2, +24VCD (red); pin 3, signal (orange).
Use and operation
Zero setting
If the zero position deviates when using this unit, adjust the zero position by the following
methods. For the zero setting, it is required to clean the probe head of sensor, then connect to the
power supply and connect the current meter in series. (If you measure the voltage, connect the
load resistance in series and the two ends of resistance are connected to the voltmeter and the
output current value is measured voltage divided by the resistance. It is suggested to use the load
resistance of 100.), and then adjust the zero setting screws on the shell of transmitter so that the
output of transmitter is 4mA.
Range adjustment
The measuring range has been adjusted to the proper position before leaving factory and in
general, uses have no need to re-adjust. But if it is used for a long time, it is adjusted following the
steps below in order to obtain better accuracy;
1) The thermistor is not connected, unfasten pins of brown wire and blue wire,
connect a standard resistance of 100K to the transmitter which is an electrical
conductivity value of 25.
2) Pass through the center hole with a wire and two ends of the wire are connected to the
resistance box to form a ring resistance circuit.
3) Connect the required power supply and connect in series a current meter to the power
supply, used for detection;
4) After finishing the preparations above, first correct the zero position, namely, when the
ring resistance RL=, the output is 4mA; if the zero position deviates, it is required to
adjust the zero setting screws on the shell of transmitter so that the output of transmitter
is 4mA;
5) Connect the resistance box to make the ring resistance R L=1.8, and then the output
shall be 200.16mA; if it deviates, take down the components of circuit and adjust the
marked 3296-type range potentiometer so that the output is 20mA.
6) Repeat steps 4 and 5 until zero position and full range value of output are in the
acceptable range.
Linear test (see test wiring diagram)
1) Relation of output current and conductivity
The relation of electrical conductivity and the output current is linear. The output current I
(mA) and the electrical conductivity will be expressed by the following formula:
s = 15.625(1 - 4) ms cm (Measuring range 250ms/cm) s = 3.125(1 - 4) ms cm
(Measuring range 50ms/cm)
98
Figure 3.12-3
2) Corresponding values of output current and ring resistance for checkup
RL I RL
9K 4mA 9K
144 5mA 28.8
72 6mA 14.4
36 8mA 7.2
18 12mA 3.6
12 16mA 2.4
9 20mA 1.8
50ms/cm 250ms/cm
Probe part
Open the end cover of transmitter, check terminals of 1-7 to judge whether the probe is
normal or not. The methods are as follows:
Use resistance shift of multimeter to
measure insulation resistance:
insulation resistance between any of
terminals 1-7 and the aluminum shell
>20M; insulation resistance
between 1 or 2 and 4 >20M; Figure 3.12-4
Insulation resistance between
99
terminals 1 and 2, 3 and 5, 4 and 5 is 0 respectively;

Insulation resistance between terminals 6 and 7 is about 100K at 25, <100K,
when temperature is higher than 25 and >100 K when temperature is
lower than 25. Open circuit or short circuit are not allowed;
Power on to check the zero potentiometer. When rotating the potentiometer, the
value of V shall change.
If requirements are not satisfied, it indicates that probe fails and it should be
replaced;
If requirements are not satisfied, power off, use the resistance shift of
multimeter to check whether the resistance value changes or not when the
potentiometer is rotating. The potentiometer fails if there is no change and it should
be replaced.
Transmitter part
After the probe is judged to be normal, but the whole electrical conductivity sensor is still
abnormal, thus the transmitter part can be judged to be damaged. It is suggested to send it back to
the manufacturing factory for repair.
Maintenance
SK-8D03/04 electrical conductivity sensor is composed of two parts: transmitter and probe
with protective cover that can be dismounted. The protective cover can prevent the probe from
unexpected damage and ensure the accuracy of measurement. Therefore, it should be noticed to
install a protective cover on the probe before using it and avoid foreign matter entering the cover
in the course of measuring (such as temperature sensor).
Pollutants and mud crusts on the probe will influence the accuracy of measurement.
Therefore, after each use, it is required to flush the adherent mud away immediately. It is not
allowed to use a probe with dried mud.
Before SK-8D03/04 electrical conductivity sensors are put into use, zero position and full
range should be checked. If necessary, conduct the linear test.
XIX.13 SK-8M04 density sensor

This sensor is used to measure the density of drilling fluid.
Overview
This sensor is used for measuring the density of drilling fluid of petroleum drilling and it can
also be used to measure the flow rate of liquid, gas, steam and liquid level.


100

Measuring range: 0-2.5g/cm3

Accuracy: not greater than 0.02g/cm3

Anti-hazard classification: d IICT5

Installation
SK-8M04 density sensor adopts sealed three-core
socket: pin 1, shielding layer; pin 2, +24VDC (red);
pin 3, signal (orange).
Parameters such as zero position, measuring
range of SK-8M04 density sensor have been subjected
to strict debugging, inspection and sealing before
leaving factory. Users only need to put it in the air
before using it, observing whether the output current is
4mA (namely the density is 0g/cm3). If there exist
deviations, they can adjust zero position Z
Figure 3.13-1 Schematic diagram of installing sensor
potentiometer slightly. Weld the fixed support of
sensor to the corresponding tank surface first, and then gas-cut a square hole a little bigger than
the sensor probe on the tank surface. Select to install sensors in the inflow and outflow mud
respectively. The transduction part of the transmitter should be above the liquid level of mud and
invasion of mud is not allowed. Fix the sensor with the fixed support. Insert the three-core hole
plug of the density sensor signal output line (black) into the three-core needle socket
corresponding to 9N21 and screw it up (Figure 3.13-1).
Attention:
When the liquid level of mud fluctuates, both upper and lower flanges must be
immersed in the mud completely. They must maintain vertical and inclination is not
allowed; otherwise the accuracy of measurement will be influenced.
The sensor should be installed at a position where the flow of mud is relatively stable in
the mud pit to ensure the normal work of the sensor.
Adjustment
Zero setting
Put the mud density sensor in the air, adjust the zero setting screws in the transmitter so
that the output current is 4mA, <0.12mA. After zero setting, dont power off immediately; if
the power is turned off 30s later after zero setting, the zero point will restore to its original
value. Please note that zero setting shall be conducted under the conditions that upper and
lower flanges are dry.
101
Gain control
Screw off the end cover of transmitter, insert the imbedded indicating meter into the
circuit board, then put the sensor in the fresh water and connect the power supply; due to the
fact that the density of water is 1, the meter head shall display 40%, the output current signal
is 10.4mA. If the reading shows a relatively large deviation, press the button in the right
lower of display; when HSET text is displayed, adjust the zero setting screws to display the
correct percentage and now the displayed value twinkles, showing the status adjustment. Re-
press the button of display to stably display the digit and finish the adjustment after waiting
for 30s (Figure 3.13-2).
Figure 3.13-2
Test on linearity of sensor (See Table 3.13-1)
If uses want to use a simple method to test the linearity
and full range value of sensor, they can use the checkup
flange (optional parts), take down the protective cover of
sensor and install the checkup flange on the lower flange. Fill
the plastic hose with fresh water, unscrew the air discharge
screw on the checkup flange, and add a certain quantity of
water to make the water spill out from the air discharge screw,
then screw up the screw and clap the plastic hose to drive out
the air bubbles in the hose wall (Figure 3.13-3). Then connect
the power supply and connect the current meter in series to
the output loop (or install the imbedded indicating hand),
change the height of liquid level and you can see the output
signal changes and this change shall be approximately Figure 3.13-3 Schematic diagram
of linearity test
102
conform to Table 3.13-1. For the final debugging, description in clauses 1 and 2 shall prevail.
After finishing the debugging, it is required to take out the embedded indicating meter and screw
up the end cover. For the final debugging, description in clauses 1 and 2 shall prevail. After
finishing the debugging, it is required to take out the embedded indicating meter and screw up the
end cover.
Table 3.13-1
H (mm) 0 300 450 600 750
3
(g/cm ) 0 1 1.5 2 2.5
% 0 40 60 80 100
I (mA) 4 10.4 13.6 16.8 20

When trouble occurs to the sensor that users cant eliminate, please send it to the company
for repair.
Maintenance
Avoid damage caused by collision when dismounting flange measuring diaphragm which
should be washed frequently during use.
The high- and low-pressure capillaries connecting flange with sealed measuring
diaphragm are packed in the caulking groove of the support to prevent the capillaries from
being damaged, distorted and squeezed by vibration.
Dont damage the diaphragm contacting the mud, and use water to wash the diaphragm
slightly. It is forbidden to scrap it with hard matter to avoid damaging the diaphragm.
The sensor installed in the mud pit should keep vertically upright status. Otherwise, it will
influence the measuring results.
The sensor should be installed at a position where the flow of mud is
relatively stable in the mud pit to ensure the normal work of the sensor.

XIX.14 SK-8W01A drilling fluid temperature sensor
This sensor is used to measure the temperature of drilling fluid.
Overview
SK-8W01/02 and SK-8W01A/02A temperature sensors are resistance
bulbs made of platinum tinsel, and can be used to measure the temperature of
mud. They are equipped with anti-collided metal housing bracket and
characterized by high accuracy, high resolution, safety and reliability, and
convenience to use, etc. They can also directly measure the temperature of
liquid, steam and gas medium in various production process. This sensor can
measure temperature by using the characteristics that the resistance of metal
will change with the variation of temperature. Its heating element is the slim
platinum tinsel that is wrapped doubly on the skeleton made of Figure 3.14-1 Outside drawing of
temperature sensor
103
insulating material uniformly (Figure 3.14-1).

The resistance value (R0) at 0of the temperature sensing element and the ratio of it to
the resistance value (R100) at 100 of the temperature sensing element: R0=1000.1,
R100/R0 =1.3850.001
Measuring range: 0-100

Time constant: <90s
The minimum inserting depth: >160mm
Insulation resistance: 20M (100V)
After the current converting module (Figure 3.14-2), SK-8W01A/02A outputs 4-20mA
current signal of two-wire system.
Measuring accuracy: 0.5% F.S
Weld the fixed support of sensor to the corresponding tank surface first, and then gas-cut a
square hole a little bigger than the sensor probe on the tank surface. Select to install sensors in the
mud pits of both inlet and outlet respectively. Put the probe part into the mud completely and fix
the sensor with the fixed support. Insert the three-core hole plug of the temperature sensor signal
output line (black) into the three-core needle socket corresponding to 9N21 and screw it up
(Figure 3.14-3).
Pin definition of aviation plug: pin 1, shielding layer; pin 2, +24VCD (red); pin 3, signal
(orange).
Figure 3.14-2 Current transmitting unit Figure 3.14-3 Schematic diagram of installing
temperature sensor
Precautions for installation and use
This sensor is compatible with and can replace the imported temperature sensors of the
same type.
The sensor used for measuring mud temperature can be classified into two types: inlet
temperature sensor and outlet temperature sensor, and their differences lie in external
104
dimensions;
Mud inlet temperature sensor can be fixed inside the mud pit at the inlet of mud pump with
the fixed support.
If troubles occur to the temperature sensor during use, first check the cable for any
disconnection, short circuit and detachment of the connector.
To check for troubles of the temperature sensor, you can use the resistance shift of
multimeter to measure the two ends of the leading wire of Pt100 thermistor. The
resistance values should range between 100-140. Otherwise, the platinum wire is open
circuited or the joint contacts poorly.
If troubles occur to this sensor, it is suggested to send it to the factory for repair.
Maintenance
Clean in time the mud stuck to the sensor, if any to ensure reliable and correct operation
of the sensor.
Cables should be erected under the principles not to hinder the field operations of
operators on well site, uneasy to buck or damage, safety and reliability;

XIX.15 SK-8L03A mud outlet flow sensor
This sensor is used to measure the relative variation of outlet flow rate of drilling mud.
Overview
SK-8L03A outlet flow sensor is used to measure the relative variation of outlet flow rate of
mud. According to the continuity principle and Bernoulli equation of mud and the force analysis
of baffle, the functional relation between the flow rate and the amplitude of fluctuation of sensor
baffle can be obtained. This sensor can linearly reflect the angular
displacement of baffle with the resistance variation of resistor, thus
measuring the relative variation of mud flow rate. Current
transmitting unit is added to the flow sensor of current type, which
will convert the output into current. It has passed explosion-proof
certification.
Output current: 4-20mA
Variation range of resistance value: 0.5-2.15K
Opening angle of baffle: 0-45
Measuring range: 0-100%. The measuring range can be
changed by changing the mass of the counterweight block of
baffle.
Fig.3.15-1 Outside drawing of sensor
Explosion symbol: Exib II BT5
Features
105
It has good air-tight performance. The sensor uses sealing device at the pulling bar
position of baffle, which solves the problem that the mud enters the electrical and
mechanical transmission parts. It improves the performance and service life of the sensor.
With smaller external dimension, it is convenient for installation (Figure 3.15-1).
Installation
First, select a position for welding the fixed support of sensor. Dismantle the fixed bolts and
rubber gaskets around the sensor and take off the fixed support. Gas-cut an opening in conformity
with the fixed support on the outlet pipe of drilling fluid according to the size of the fixed support,
and then weld all of four borders of the fixed support with the gas-cut opening together; put the
sensor into the mud pipe, set rubber gaskets and spin the fixed bolt tightly. You can also fix the
sensor inside the mud ditch at the outlet of mud with the fixed support. Insert the three-core hole
plug of the flow sensor signal output line (black) into the three-core needle socket corresponding
to 9N21 and screw it up (Figure 3.15-2).
Pin definition of aviation plug: pin 1, shielding layer; pin 2, +24VCD (red); pin 3, signal
(orange).
Attention:
It is advisable that the baffle immergence depth should ensure the baffle is not
obstructed by sedimentary sand, and after installation, you should inspect if the baffle
can swing freely within the pipe space and does not collide with the internal wall of
pipeline. Otherwise the accuracy of senor output signal will be influenced.
Figure 3.15-2 Schematic diagram of installing outlet flow sensor

The design of the sensor has taken into account many conditions such as applying to
different drilling rigs and outlet pipes with different size. The relative installation position of its
baffle can be moved up and down; the bolt hole can be installed on a basis of dislocation; a long
hole is opened on the baffle so as to be convenient for adjusting as required. In addition, there are
also two kinds of weighting block equipped for users to select freely according to different on-site
conditions. You can use one weighting block individually or both of them together. If the flow rate
106
of mud is very high, when the oscillating arm of sensor rushes to the limit position, you can
increase the balance weight appropriately; if the flow rate of mud is relatively low and the
oscillation amplitude of the sensor oscillating arm is very small, you can decrease the balance
weight accordingly.
Use and operation
The current type sensor is equipped with current transmitting unit inside the sealed junction
box. Its appearance and connection are shown in Figure 3.15-3. Zero point and full measuring
range have been adjusted well before leaving factory. If necessary, ask professionals to adjust
it.
Selection of load resistance RL of current type sensor must meets the following formula:
V - 7.5
RL < - R
20mA
In the formula: VPower
is the supply voltage (V);
RLine is cable resistance
(K); usually RL=250.
Used in explosion-
proof place: the cable
of sensor connects the
isolation barrier
directly. The
distributed
capacitance of cable
0.15f and the Figure 3.15-3 Current transmitting unit
distributed inductance2mH. The cable of sensor is
shielding sheathed cable, with core cross-section > 0.5mm 2. The shielding layer is insulated
from the shell and should be grounded in a safe place.
If the flow sensor has no signal output in normal operation, first check the extension cable for
any breakage or short circuit.
To check for the troubles of 8L03 flow sensor, you can take out the sensor from the mud ditch
and use the resistance shift of multimeter to measure the pins 1 and 3 of the aviation plug.
There should be resistance value of 2.15K. The resistance values between pins 1 and 2 or
between pins 2 and 3 should change in the range of 0-2.15K with changes of baffle angle.
Replace failed varistor, if any, with the varistor of the same specification. If jamming occurs
to the baffle without variations of angle, disassemble the stainless steel cover in the upper of
it to check the internal mechanical parts. After eliminating the troubles of mechanical
transmission parts, add lubricating oil to the moving mechanical parts. For the current type
sensor, if cable connection is normal, disassemble the encloser to check the potentiometer. If
the potentiometer is in good condition, damage of current transmitting unit should be taken
into account.
Method for replacing potentiometer:
Open the protective cover, unfasten the fixed screw of the pinion gear and take down the
pinion gear. After unsoldering the wire head of potentiometer, unfasten the fixed screw
of the potentiometer socket, dismantle the potentiometer socket (with potentiometer) and
take down 3-M3 screw;
107
Replace with a new potentiometer WDD35D5K1%. It should be noticed when wilding

the conductor with the pin of potentiometer, usually, do not operate more than 5s each
time to avoid damage of potentiometer resulting from a large quantity of heat transfer;
Mount the pinion gear, adjust the rotating handle position of the potentiometer and
measure with multimeter. When the swing-rod is in the initial position, the resistance
value of potentiometer should range between 0.5-0.6K. And it should be noticed that
the spiral spring in the position of pinion gear should be screwed properly (to the extent
that the clearance between bull gear and pinion gear can be eliminated), and then tighten
the fixed screw on the pinion gear.
Maintenance
Erect cables under the principles uneasy to buck, damage, safety and
reliability.
Add lubricating oil frequently added to the moving parts of sensor to make it
move flexibly.
XIX.16 H2S detection device

For details of calibration method, refer to the operation manual of optional parts.
H2S detection device is used to detect the concentration of H2S that returns to the surface with
the drilling fluid and disperses into the air so as to give alarms timely to ensure the safety of
drilling operation.
The H2S detection devices currently used can be divided into two kinds: one of them is a H 2S
sensor integrating the sensor and the detection device; another is a H 2S detection/alarm device
with sensor and detection device separated, in which the sensor is installed in the outdoor
dangerous area, while the H2S detection/alarm device is installed inside the instrument room.
Installation position: It is usually installed above the drilling fluid outlet and the ideal
distance between it and the tank surface should be about 1m.
Installation steps: First, select a place. If there is no proper fixing position, you can make it
on site. When installing the sensor, you should place its probe downwards vertically and fix the
sensor properly with the fixed support equipped for the sensor. For an integrated H 2S senor, fix the
CAN bus node near the sensor and insert the four-core hole plug of the signal output line (black)
of H2S senor into the three-core needle socket corresponding to 9N11 and tighten it (Figure 3.16-
1).
Pin definition of aviation connector: 1, 0V (black); 2, +24VCD (red); 3, signal (orange); 4,
shielding layer.
Attention:
It is not advisable to install the sensor too high or too low; otherwise, the measurement
results will be influenced.
H2S sensor of Shenkai standard configuration is General Monitors S214, which adopts
metal oxide probe with the continuous service life being about 5 years. Please replace it
in time before the service life is over.
108
Warning
The splash guard should be installed on the sensor probe during use to prevent mud or
other liquid from splashing on the surface of the probe.
Drying agent and protective cover should be installed on the sensor probe when
powering off to stop using, to avoid the probe being damaged by moisture.
Figure 3.16-1 Schematic diagram of installing H2S detection device
XIX.17 Connection method of top-drive torque and top-drive rotation speed

After rotary table drive is replaced by top drive, the time efficiency of well drilling is
improved greatly, and the original connected rotary table speed and rotary torque signals become
meaningless, as in this case, what the driller needs to refer to and monitor are the rotation speed
and torque value of the top drive.
Below is an example of Varco top drive, used to introduce its installation and connection
methods.
Varco Drillers Console is a cuboid control box. On the control panel of the box, there are
two instruments: top-drive rotation speed and top-drive torque, displaying the rotation speed and
torque value of the top drive in real time.
For any top drive, a client interface will be reserved for the third party instrument, such as 4-
20mA interface or 0-10V interface. Varco top drive is no exception. Maintainers can use the client
to connect SK-9N21 (A-type) analog node (as the interface directly outputs current or voltage
signal, it is unnecessary to connector the sensor). In fact, the client interface is an analog signal
109
distributor, which converts one channel of input signal into multiple channels of signal for output.
Rotation speed and torque meters of Varco top drive have occupied their own 0-10V interfaces,
leaving us two 0-20mA interfaces. We can use a 9N21 A-type node for each interface, and connect
pins 1 and 3 at the output of three-core needle socket corresponding to nodes into the current
output (Figure 3.15-1). Set node channel in the software and perform current initialization.
Pin definition of aviation connector: 1, -signal (black); 2, null; 3, +signal (orange).
Figure 3.17-1
Table 3.17-1 Connection of the current output and node
Varco client output 0-20Ma SK-9N21 analog node
Rotation 2.1-Positive pole 3-4-20mA input
speed 2.2-Negative pole 1-common end
QW260
Torque 3.1-Positive pole 3-4-20mA input
QW262 3.2-Negative pole 1-common end
If the interface given by Varco top drive client output is 0-10V, it will have some troubles
during processing. As the sampling voltage inside the node is 0-0.5V, and the sampling resistance
is 25, so voltage division is needed. Set an equivalent resistance of 470 outside to make the
sampling resistance inside the node within the range of 0-0.5V and also make the current in the
loop within 0-20mA. A-type node of 4-20mA (pins 3 and 1 of node) can be connected to its
voltage output.
Table 3.17-2 Wiring Table
Varco client output 0-10V 470 SK-9N03 analog node
resistance
Rotation 0.1-Positive pole 1 3-4-20mA input
speed 0.2-Negative pole 2 1-common end
QW256
Torque 1.1-Positive pole 1 3-4-20mA input
110
QW258 1.2-Negative pole 2 1-common end
Divider resistance can be disassembled from the standby circuit board. If there is no 470
resistance, resistance of a little larger than 470 will be Ok. But it should not be too large to avoid
affecting the precision. It is suggested that the resistance is 1/2W, and at least 1/4W. The original
drawing for wiring is as follows.
Figure 3.17-2 Schematic diagram of external divider circuit

If both drilling instrument and logging unit need to be connected, the following method can be
adopted for connection (Figure 3.17-3):
Figure 3.17-3 Use of drilling instrument

Note: either instrument has problem or is not used in the future, it is only required to make
the wire of pins 3 and 1 short connection and it shall not influence the use of the other instrument.
XX Installation and connection of CAN bus and explosion-

proof isolation barrier
After finishing installing the senor, begin to connect CAN bus digital acquisition equipment.
Explosion-proof CAN bus digital acquisition equipment includes CAN acquisition adapter card (it
is installed in the collector when leaving factory), CAN bus explosion-proof isolation barrier
(commonly known as node) and CAN bus shielding cable.
Select safe and clean positions near the drilling platform, outlet ditch of mud and mud tank to
fix three SK-9N21 multi-channel CAN bus explosion-proof acquisition interface boxes and
111
several SK-9N11 single-channel CAN bus explosion-proof acquisition interfaces. Connect the
sensors in the three areas to the corresponding interface box channels respectively. Connect the
three-wire analog sensors (such as H 2S and electrical torque) to the corresponding SK-9N11
single-channel CAN bus explosion-proof acquisition interfaces and fasten them.
Use CAN bus shielding cable to connect each SK-9N21 multi-channel CAN bus explosion-
proof acquisition interface box and SK-9N11 single-channel CAN bus explosion acquisition
interface in series. The bus can enter the inside of the explosion-proof shell through different
explosion-proof acquisition interfaces or inlet and outlet of CAN bus shielding cable at the bottom
of the interface box and can be connected to the corresponding connection terminals on the circuit
board. Each explosion-proof interface and interface box are on the bus regardless of the order
(Figure 4-1 and 4-2). The head end of CAN bus is connected to the explosion-proof junction box
in the rear cabin of the mud logging unit, and the last CAN bus explosion-proof acquisition
interface only connects the inlet CAN bus shielding cable. The spare bus connection terminal is
connected to the terminal resistor (Figure 4-3). Then install the engine degasser.
The two interfaces of card connecting CAN bus shielding cable

are the same, and the inlet and outlet are not differentiated.
Parallel connection is adopted to connect two CAN bus shielding
cables in and out, and the connection definitions are as follows:
V-: Connect power supply 0V (black wire of CAN bus cable)
V+: Connect power supply +24V (red wire of CAN bus cable)
CAN_L: Connect low level signal of CAN (blue wire of CAN
bus cable)
CAN_H: Connect high level signal of CAN (white wire of CAN
bus cable)
The exposed shield lines at the inlet and outlet of CAN bus cable are connected with each
other
Figure 4.1 Schematic diagram of cable wiring of CAN bus inside SK-9N21 multi-
channel CAN bus explosion-proof acquisition interface box
112
Position of card connecting

CAN bus shielding cable. The
connection definition is the
same as that inside SK-9N21
Inlet and outlet of CAN bus shielding cable
Figure 4.2 Schematic diagram of cable wiring of CAN bus inside SK-9N11 single-
channel CAN bus explosion-proof acquisition interface
Only inlet CAN bus shielding cable is

connected to the last interface or interface box,
and the spare bus connection terminal is
connected to the terminal resistance.
The 120terminal resistance is connected

to CAN_L and CAN_H of the spare bus
connection terminal.
Inlet CAN bus shielding cable
Figure 4.3 Connection method for the last interface or interface box
113
Figure 4.4 Field connection diagram of CAN bus equipment adopting SK-9N21/11
explosion-proof acquisition interface box
114
XXI Degasser
XXI.1 SK-7T05 engine degasser
Overview
The redesigned SK-7T05 engine degasser is a new generation of product. This degasser, with
measure of freezing protection, is composed of installation standpipe, fixed seat, screw rod
hoisting gear, gas cylinder and gas purification box (Figure 5.1-1).
Figure 5.1-1 Assembly drawing of SK-7T05 engine degasser
The degassing process is as follows: mud beam

flux splashing due to agitation freezing
protection protection against plugging drying
sucking off.
The engine degasser of this type has been greatly
improved and optimized on several aspects as
follows:
Adopt a stainless square installation
standpipe with C shape clamp fixed seat and
a bearing with locking structure, making the
Structure of 7T05 degasser Structure of old degasser
device structure more compact and light, the
Figure 5.1-2 Comparison of gas cylinder structure
installation and adjustment range more
extensive and the operation more convenient and flexible.
115
The hoisting gears of both motor and gas cylinder adopt screw rod structure and hand
wheel adjustment, and they can be adjusted upwards and downwards easily during use.
Optimize the flow direction of gas in the gas cylinder and lower the air inlet of gas
cylinder, thus making the escaped gas due to agitation much easier to be carried to the
air entry by the supplemented air. It has been proved by experiments that this can
enhance the degassing efficiency of degasser (Figure 5.1-2).
Improve the structure of explosion proof motor, thus isolating mud steam from the
motor effectively, preventing oil starvation of lower bearings and insulation of motor
from being destroyed, and ensuring that it can work for long time reliably in the rain in
open air and the steam on the mud ditch surface.
Improve the form of mud outlet pipe of degasser, thus reducing the probability of
escaped gas leaking from the mud outlet pipe.
The gas purification box adopts open structure and is fixed on the upper part of the
standpipe, making the device integrated and convenient for maintenance. Even multiple
kinds of countermeasures have been deployed for the gas cylinder to avoid sucking in
mud; a bridge breaker is still equipped in the box to prevent mud from being sucked into
the gas line. Besides the bridge breaker, there is a drying bottle capable of containing
more desiccants as well, and at the same time, there is a back flash ditch for deliquescent
desiccant (calcium chloride).
Add a leakage detection
valve, making leakage
detection of degasser much
easier.
Inherit and enhance lots of
advantages of the past several
engine degassers of different
types:
With flexible structure,
different components can be
disintegrated conveniently
during installation and
maintenance.
Convenient for adjusting,
when it is required to adjust
the depth of degasser
2a. Install 10 adhesion proof pipe 2b. Install 6all rubber hose
(Install additional 10 banded pipe of rubber hose directly) (Install
additional 6M8 couplers on both ends)
116 Figure 5.1-3 Connection diagram of gas pipeline of degasser
immersed in the mud pit, the operator can finish this job without carrying any tool.
Add measures of mud splashing to make the degassing efficiency higher than general
engine degasser.
Antifreezing measures:
There are two sizes of couplers for the gas collection opening. The smaller sized coupler can
be used to connect common rubber hose. If there are antifreezing requirements, the larger
sized coupler should be used (Figure 5.1-3);
Larger sized hose should be used for antifreezing to reduce the flow rate of gas passing this
hose and increase the retention time of gas in this hose so that there are more possibilities for
water vapor to be cooled, or to make water vapor completely condensed here;
Adopt pipelines (10) made of special material. When water vapors condense, all condensed
water globules can not adhere to the pipeline and they will descent and return to the gas
cylinder as a result of gravitation;
According to the requirements mentioned above, the outgoing pipeline of gas cylinder should
keep vertically upwards status as much as possible to make water globules slide down
smoothly. The length of pipeline can be configured and adjusted as appropriate;
If there are phenomena of freezing at the nozzle of gas cylinder, you can take local insulation
measures additionally;
The pipelines made of special materials are characterized by not absorbing oil and gas, but it
is lack of elasticity like rubber hose. To ensure the sealing performance of its pipe orifice, the
degasser is equipped with a piece of rubber hose with corresponding size, which is hitched on
the end of the special pipeline to strengthen its elasticity.
Motor
Type: YBSC71-2-4 explosion-proof three-phase asynchronous motor
Power: 370W
Power supply: 380V /50Hz
Volume of gas cylinder: 170270mm
Adjustable range of height: ~300mm (installing position adjustment 850mm)
The total weight of equipment: 27kg
Installation
The agitation shaft and the motor are connected to the end screw thread, and a double-
ear lock washer is installed in the middle part to avoid loosening. The coupling seat and the
gas cylinder are fixed with 4 bolts, forming the gas cylinder component. The coupling seat
117
of gas cylinder is installed on the square standpipe and can move up and down. The
installation screw rod at the top of the motor is connected to the upper support arm. You can
use the hand wheel at the top to adjust the height. When adjusting to the predetermined height,
press the hold-down wrench on the coupling seat, then the gas cylinder can be fixed on the
square installation standpipe firmly. There is another fixed seat installed on the square
installation standpipe and you can fix it with mud ditch, etc. firmly using the C shape clamp
on the fixed seat.
Usually the following installation modes are available according to on-site requirements:
C shape clamp of fixed seat can be fixed on one side of the mud ditch or shaker screen
stand directly (Figure 5.1-4).
When intending to install it on the mud outlet pipe, you can weld a steel plate with
appropriate size on the outlet pipe vertically and then fix the degasser on this steel plate
using the fixed seat.
When necessary, you can weld additional fabricated sections (angle steel or flat iron) on
any position where you prepare to install degassers in the same way, and then you can
fix degassers conveniently and rapidly.
The installation direction of degasser should be determined according to on-site
requirements. You can unscrew four unloosing screws that connect the coupling seat and
the gas cylinder and screws on cylinder bottom pup joint, rotate the gas cylinder and the
cylinder bottom pup joint for 90 or 180 respectively and then screw up. Then the
direction of mud inlet and outlet can be changed (Figure 5.1-5)
118
a. Fix it on the mud ditch b. Fix it on the shaker screen stand

Figure 5.1-4 Method for fixing degasser
Figure 5.1-5 Example of different installation directions of degasser
119
Connect the gas pipeline from gas cylinder to the inlet of the bridge breaker inside the
gas purification box, and connect the outlet of the bridge breaker to the inlet of the
drying cylinder using the same gas pipeline. The anhydrous calcium chloride should be
added as the drying agent in the drying cylinder, and the outlet of the drying cylinder is
connected to a small segment of PU pipe in which the non-absorption pipeline is
inserted (Figure 5.1-6).
With CaCl2 inside the drying PU pipe is connected to

non-adsorption pipe
cylinder, both ends of the
Dont set the bridge plug are equipped with a little
breaker in wrong absorbent cotton.
direction, and it should
be put upward as shown
here.
Bridge
breaker
This end is connected to This end directly

the gas outlet of the connects non-
degasser using adsorption pipe to
polyethylene white hose logging room
Figure 5.1-6 Connection diagram of bridge breaker and drying cylinder on the degasser (Take
the connection of 6 all rubber hose as an example)
120
Figure 5.1-7 Connection diagram of bridge breaker and drying cylinder in the gas
purification box (Take the connection of 6 all rubber hose as an example)
Attention:
Anhydrous calcium chloride and other drying agents without absorbability to
hydrocarbon components should be added in the sample gas drying cylinder and should
be replaced as soon as possible after deteriorating caused by damp.
After 4 non-adsorption pipeline and 60C constant temperature heater band are
packed together using insulation cotton cover, they are connected to sample gas inlet of
the rear cabin of the mud logging unit (Figure 5.1-8).
Non-absorption gas pipeline is

connected to PU pipe at the
bottom of the drying cylinder
The end of the heater

band is suspended
60C constant temperature heater band

Insulation cotton cover
Gas pipelines of tens of meters long

from the degasser to mud logging
unit are required to be packed using
insulation cotton cover like this.
Figure 5.1-8 Packing method of non-adsorption pipeline and constant temperature heater
band
Non-absorption pipeline is connected

to the input of sample gas after
connecting to PU pipe.
121
Figure 5.1-9 The other end of the non-adsorption pipeline is connected to the sample gas
inlet of the rear cabin of the mud logging unit
After 4 non-adsorption pipeline and 60C constant temperature heater band are
packed together using insulation cotton cover, they are connected to sample gas inlet of the
rear cabin of the mud logging unit.
Power supply connection (Figure 5.1-6)

Connect 380V three-phase alternating current power line from the rear cabin of the mud logging
unit to the power explosion-proof junction box of the degasser.
Figure 5.1-6 Sketch map of connection of heater band and degasser hole seat
Use and operation
When it is required to adjust the height of degasser in the course of operation, first unfasten
the compacting spanner on the connection seat, rotate the hand wheel to adjust the height of
degasser and fasten the compacting spanner after adjusting it to the designated position. Its
adjustable range is 0-300mm. If it cannot be adjusted to the designated position, you can change
the height of fixed mount to adjust the position of the whole equipment and its adjustable range is
850mm.
Two kinds of gas pipes of degasser are available: 10 anti-freezing pipe and 6 all rubber
hose. 10 anti-freezing pipe can be connected directly to the outlet pipe nipple of gas cylinder and
air inlet pipe of bridge breaker of purification box to prevent deformation and loosening in the
course of operation and outside the 10 pipe, a segment of 10 rubber hose (about 30mm long) is
installed to improve its elasticity. When it is required to install a 6 pipeline, add 6M81 joints
at mouths of the inlet and outlet pipes of bridge breaker and gas cylinder (M81 female threads
are available in the inlet and outlet pipes), connect 6 all rubber hose directly to 6 joint.
After using for a period, immediate correction is needed when the packing force of
compacting spanner on the support connection seat is inadequate. (Figure 5.1-7)
Loosen check bolts (M8 hexagonal-head bolt);
122
Compact the spanner to the compacting position;

Properly wrench (dextrorotation) screws in the shaft position (when loosening the
drawworks, the connection seat doesnt slide down but however, the compacting spanner can
be pulled by hand);
Screw up check blots.
Correct the height of gas cylinder and pull the compacting spanner to the limiting position in
the fastening direction. If the spanner is not in the designated position, the compacting point may
be on the cam slope and it will automatically loosen after vibrating.
Figure 5.1-7 Fastening of support connection seat
123
Figure 5.1-8 Hoisting structure of SK-7T05 engine degasser

Abnormal noise appeared during the operation of the motor may be caused by friction due
to distortion of stirrer shaft or abrasion due to oil shortage of shaft. Adjust the motor or
replace the corresponding parts before running it again.
Usually the motor insulation should be more than 20M. If insulation drop gives rise to
abnormal operation, take down it for repair and dry to restore its insulation performance.
When reinstalling the motor, it is required to conduct water-proof processing on all the
junction planes.
Warning
Users should handle the water proof problem of outgoing power cable of explosion-
proof motor properly to ensure reliable insulation even during long-term working in
rain. If it is necessary to connect lines in the rain, the power must be shut off. In
addition, users must inspect the insulation resistance of the motor regularly to judge if it
is invaded by water vapor.
To ensure long-term and reliable operation of the device, users must guarantee the
quality of power supply. High-voltage and low-frequency power supply is extremely
disadvantageous to normal work. Open-phase supply is never allowed. If the system has
no protective devices, users should consider the distribution protection.
Maintenance
124
In addition, users must inspect the insulation resistance of the motor regularly to judge if
it is invaded by water vapor.
After the gas pipeline is connected or in normal operation, it is necessary to use the
sample air extracting pump equipped for the chromatograph to conduct system leakage
checking. All the rubber end plugs equipped for the purification system of this device are
conical. And the sealing performance can be ensured by stuffing them up with force.
The depth of gas cylinder immersed in the mud should be 40-60mm, in which case the
maximum degassing efficiency can be reached. The operation mode of centrifugal pump
will be generated if it is too deep, while splashing volume of mud will be not enough if it
is too shallow. Anyway, the purpose is to pursue the maximum degassing efficiency.
Users can adjust it according to the displayed base value. After adjusting the height, it is
required to pull the compacting spanner to the limiting position in the fastening direction
to lock it.
If the sand outside the degasser influences mud level and the volume of mud drained out
by the discharge outlet, the degassing efficiency will be changed. It is required to adjust
the degasser or eliminate the sand.
Flush and wipe the dry and wet mud deposited on the degasser regularly.
Check whether dry mud is accumulated inside the nozzle of gas cylinder, and clean the
dry mud, if any.
Check whether gas leaking point exists in each component of the gas circuit and fasten
the component if any leakage is found.
Check the leakproofness of check valve of bridge breaker. When the ball float in the
cylinder floats up to the position of check valve, leakage of the check valve is not
allowed.
Lubricating grease should be added to the wear-prone positions of degasser such as
moving, adjusting, fastening and screwing parts to make it rotate flexibly and avoid
corrosion.
If you find the hoisting hand wheel too tight, you can add lubricating oil to the screw rod.
Method: hoist the degasser to the top, disassemble the support pin of the degasser, take
down the spacing screw at the end of the screw rod, (it should be noticed that the screw is
tightened anticlockwise and unfastened clockwise.) ) After the supporting rod is taken
down, grease can be added to the screw thread. See Figure 5.1-8.
125
XXI.2 SK-7T03 pontoon engine degasser

Overview
The degassing position of degasser is very
important in the course of logging of petroleum
exploration. If the liquid level of mud is over low
and the degasser extracts the air, it will directly
influence the quality of logging data; if the liquid
level of mud is over high and the degasser
extracts mud, it will influence the continuity of
logging data.
Therefore, when the degasser is working, it
is required to adjust the degassing position of the
degasser according to changes in volume of the
drilling fluid to adapt the changes of the mud
level in the mud ditch to obtain the maximum
degassing efficiency.
To make degasser height adjustable, SK-
7T02G engine degasser adopts hand winch to
adjust the position of the degasser in the drilling
fluid ditch through winding and unwinding the
steel cable on the winch. Although this method
can solve the problems of height adjusting and Figure 5.2-1 Structural diagram of SK-7T03
positioning of the degasser, operator is asked to pontoon engine degasser
be attended to observe changes in mud level, and
adjust accordingly. If the operator is absent or the judgment of the mud level at night is incorrect,
the position of the degasser cant be adjusted accurately and timely, which will cause accidents
such as degasser extracting air or mud, and the accuracy and continuity of the logging data will be
influenced.
To overcome the defects and deficiency of manual adjustment, the level of automation of
position adjusting of degasser should be improved to the extent that no one needed. Based on
structures of degassing, gas collection and gas purifying of the original SK-7T02G engine
degasser, the new SK-7T03 pontoon engine degasser makes significant theoretical modification
and design on the height regulating mechanism. When using the SK-7T03 pontoon engine
degasser, you only need to install and regulate it for one time; then it is not necessary to intervene
the position of the degasser during this logging process any longer, thus improving the field
suitability of the degasser and providing a new type of mud degasser for discovering, judging and
interpreting reservoirs accurately, especially those ultra-thin and low productivity reservoirs
(Figure 5.2-1).
SK-7T03 pontoon engine degasser has made great improvement and optimization on several
aspects such as material, rapid height adjusting of degasser in the mud pit and automatic
126
balance according to deficiencies of the existing device, requirements of on-site use and
features of environment.
The full stainless steel is adopted, which has greatly improved the resistance of equipment
parts to environment corrosion and reliability of work, and extended the service life of the
equipment.
Automatic heaving pontoon is designed to replace hand winch based on buoyancy
principle of the mud. Adjust the balance weight of steel cable according to the density of
on-site mud to realize rapid height positioning and balance locking of the degasser in the
mud ditch, which makes the height adjusting of the engine degasser in the mud ditch very
convenient and saves time and force.
Inherit and enhance lots of advantages of SK-7T02G engine degassers:
Add measures of mud splashing to improve the degassing efficiency of the degasser.
For the gas cylinder, under the premise of keeping high degassing efficiency, the control
on the mud splashing position should be strengthened to prevent the mud from polluting
and blocking the outlet of the gas circuit.
Based on connection structure of the explosion-proof motor, it improves the motor with
regard to isolating mud steam and prevents oil starvation of lower bearings and
insulation of motor from being destroyed. Special processing can ensure the explosion-
proof motor work for long time reliably in the rain in open air and the steam on the mud
ditch surface.
The gas purification box of open structure, integrated with the device, is convenient for
maintenance.
With simple and flexible structure, it is easy to disassemble and convenient for
installation and maintenance.
Compared with SK-7T02G engine degasser, it has some prominent advantages as follows:
It adopts the automatic buoyancy principle and realizes unmanned height adjusting of the
degasser under the premise of keeping the maximum degassing efficiency, remarkably
reducing the labor intensity of operators.
With full stainless steel material and simple and practical structure, the reliability and
service life of the equipment are improved.
With Simple installation and convenient operation, it is more suitable for field drilling.
Motor
Type: YBSC71-2-4 explosion-proof three-phase asynchronous motor
Power: 370W
Power supply: 380V/50Hz
127
Volume of gas cylinder: f 170300mm
Adjustable height: ~850mm

Total weight of the equipment: ~27Kg
External dimensions: lengthwidthheight=12803302230mm
Installation
Compositions and functions of main parts of SK-7T03 pontoon engine degasser
Gas cylinder component
Its main function is to separate gas from mud and collect the separated gas. The agitation
shaft and the motor are connected to the end screw thread, and a lock ring is adopted to avoid
loosening. The motor is fixed on the upper end of the supporting seat through bolts. The
lower end of the supporting coupling seat and the gas cylinder are fastened with special
screws. The gas cylinder and the upper skirt section of the pontoon are firmly connected as
one body through self-tapping screw. The lower end of the pontoon is free and on the upper
end, a pair of anchor ears enclasps the gas cylinder firmly through screws. The slider of U-
groove structure on the anchor ear contacts the two upright round erecting poles with small
clearance for the purpose of positioning and it can slide up and down.
The moving components of the steel cable realize the suspension balance of the pontoon
in the mud through balance weight. It is composed of two pulleys equipped with rolling
bearing, steel cable suite, and weight balance.
Gas purifying component
It is used to purify and dry the separated mud gas. It is composed of gas purification
box, rubber hose for connecting, rubber hose connector and relative parts.
Frame
It provides a platform for the installation, fixing and guidance of work components. It is
composed of beam, erecting pole and carrier, and it uses sleeve for positioning, bolts for
fastening and avoiding loosening.
Installation steps
Before installation, inspect quantity and completeness of parts and components
according to the packing list attached in the packing container.
Prepare necessary installation tools (such as screwdriver and wrench, etc.);
Assembly of the engine degasser:
A. Take all parts and components and fitting screws out of the packing container and
place them properly according to the assembly position of each part and component
as shown in Figure 5.2-3.
B. Insert two erecting poles in two cylindrical sleeves on the carrier respectively,
128
rotate the erecting poles to align the threaded holes on the erecting poles with the
round holes on the cylindrical sleeves of the carrier and fix them with M816
screws. (Note: There are threaded holes on both ends of the erecting poles; don't
install it reversely.)
C. Align two U Shape slide ways on the pontoon of the gas cylinder component with
the internal side of those two erecting poles, let the gas cylinder components slide
down erecting poles slowly and put them on the carrier slightly at last.
D. Put two cylindrical sleeves on the beam onto the upper ends of those two erecting
poles respectively and fix them with M816 screws.
E. Hook the spring hook on one end of the steel cable component onto the joint hinge
of the explosion proof motor of the gas cylinder component and thread the other
end through two pulleys and droop.
F. Align two mounting holes on the bottom of gas purifier with those on the right side
of the beam and fix them with M825 screws firmly.
G. Installation of rubber hose
a) There are two sizes of rubber hose couplers equipped for the gas connection
opening. The smaller sized coupler can be used to connect common rubber hose. If
there are antifreezing requirements, the larger sized coupler should be used to
reduce the flow rate and increase the retention time of gas so that water vapor can
condense completely. See Figure 5.2-2-a and 5.2-2-b.
b) During installation, the outgoing pipeline of gas cylinder should keep vertically
upwards status as much as possible to permit water globules formed due to
condensation to slide down smoothly.
c) The length of pipeline can be configured and adjusted as appropriate.
d) If phenomena of freezing appear at the air outlet of gas cylinder, you can take local
insulation measures.
129
Fig.a Install large rubber hose Fig.b Install small rubber hose
Figure 5.2-2
130
Figure 5.2-3 Schematic diagram of field installation of SK-7T03 pontoon engine degasser
Field installation
After assembling engine degasser properly according to the above steps, erect and weld the
additional fabricated sections (two 5# angle steels with equal legs) equipped for the device on the
top of the mud ditch as per field positions, and then erect the degasser on the angle steels. Then
you can place the degasser at the working position conveniently and finish the field installation
(Figure 5.2-3).
Power supply connection (Figure 5.2-4)
Hole seat of heater band (see from wiring direction) Hole seat of degasser (see from wiring
direction)
131
Figure 5.2-4 Sketch map of connection of heater band and degasser hole seat
Use and operation
Preparation before using
1) Before using, it is required to check whether the air discharge outlet of gas cylinder is
smooth or not and to clean out mud or other sundries.
2) Before using, it is required to check the leakproofness of components in the gas circuit
and fasten them.
3) Check the leakproofness of check valve of
bridge breaker. When the ball float in the
cylinder floats up to the position of check
valve, leakage of the check valve is not
allowed.
Main operations
Installation of rubber hose
For the gas pipe of degasser, large-
size anti-freezing rubber hose and small-
size rubber hose are available and the
large rubber hose can be connected
directly to the outlet joint of gas cylinder
and air inlet pipe of bridge breaker of gas
purification box.
Fig. 5.2-5 Schematic diagram of optimal
When it is required to install small-size mud discharge
rubber hose, it is feasible to add special joints
to the outlet joint of gas cylinder and air inlet pipe of bridge breaker of gas purification
box and then install small rubber hose on the joint.
Selection of balance weight
To ensure the maximum degassing efficiency of the degasser, the following is
suggested, the depth of gas cylinder immersed in the mud meets the requirement that at
the operating status, the mud amount discharged from the gas cylinder is equivalent to
approximately 1/3 of the pipe diameter of discharge outlet. Users can adjust the balance
weight according to this to confirm the depth of the mud submerging the pontoon. After
the balance weight is selected properly, the mud is splashing through stirring. The
schematic diagram of optimal mud discharge is shown in Figure 5.2-5.
Removal of balance weight
When removing the balance weight, it is required to slowly lower the steel cable to
prevent the degasser from sliding down quickly and hitting the floating pipe and to
132
avoid unexpected damage, affecting the adjustment precision.

Common troubles and elimination methods
Abnormal noise appeared during the operation of the motor may be caused by friction due
to distortion of stirrer shaft or abrasion due to oil shortage of shaft. Adjust the motor or
replace the corresponding parts before running it again.
The insulation resistance of motor should be more than 20M (measure using the ohm
shift of multimeter). If insulation drop gives rise to abnormal operation, take down the
motor for repair and dry to restore its insulation performance. When reinstalling the
motor, it is required to conduct water-proof processing on the junction planes.
Maintenance
Users should pay attention to water-proof performance when powering on the power
outgoing wires of the motor and ensure reliable insulation during long-term working under
different weather conditions;
Inspect the insulation resistance of the motor regularly to judge if it is invaded by water
vapor;
Use the sample air extracting pump (equipped for the chromatograph) to check for
system leakage;
Flush and wipe the dry and wet mud deposited on the degasser regularly. Avoid the dry
and wet mud adhering to the moving parts such as pontoon and erecting pole and so on,
to ensure the sensitivity of the whole device;
Lubrication grease should be added to the moving parts such as pontoon U-shape
groove of the degasser, steel cable and pulley and so on, to ensure sufficient lubrication
and avoid corrosion.
Avoid bending by force when the erecting pole is in the course of use and
transportation, otherwise, the reinstallation precision will be influenced. It is forbidden
to beat the pontoon with force, to avoid distortion and fracture which will influence
normal operation.
To ensure the device works reliably for a long time, users must pay attention to the
quality of power supply, and the power supply system should have distribution
protection devices. High-voltage and low-frequency power supply should be avoided
and open-phase supply is forbidden.
XXI.3 SK-9F01 Sample Gas Blowback Device

Overview
SK-9F01 sample gas blowback device blows back vapor and mud impurity remained in
sample gas pipeline out of pipeline through high pressure air using the air compressor of mud
133
logging unit or the wellsite compressed air, so as to prevent the mud logging unit from water
accumulation and blockage after long time operation. It is the active cleaning device necessary for
each mud logging unit (Figure 5.3-1).
Features:
Two blowback gas sources available:
Air compressor installed in the instrument room
Air compressor outside the wellsite.
Blowback with the air compressor in the instrument room is the default setting.
It is convenient and easy to operate.
The filter can effectively prevent mud from being sucked into the chromatograph.
Filtering pressure-reducing Scram valve (blowback button)

valve
Wellsite compressed air

interface
Filter
Automatic drain
port
Filtered
To be
filtere
outlet
e gas
Sampl
e gas
outlet
Sampl
room Air
inlet
d
in the
compr
instru
essor
ment
Air
Figure 5.3-1 Schematic diagram of SK-9F01 sample gas blowback device
134
Wiring diagram of gas circuit (Figure 5.3-2):
Figure 5.3-2 Gas circuit wiring diagram of sample gas blowback device
The flow of gas circuit:
The normal flow of gas circuit
Air 1: Wellsite compressed air interfacefiltering pressure-reducing valve To be filtered pipe
jointactive carbon pipesilicagel pipeconnect with the Filtered pipe jointquick
four-way valve Air outlet pipe jointactive carbon pipesilicagel pipe
scram valveblockage
PE (bridge breaker)quick four-way union; The other three connections of the quick
four-way union will be connected to such units as 9G01 and 3Q04, etc. after connecting
with gas pipes.
Air 2: Pipe joint at Air compressor in the instrument roomquick four-way valvepipe joint at
Air outletactive carbon pipe
scram valveblockage
silicagel pipePE (bridge breaker)quick four-way union; The other three connections
of the quick four-way union will be connected to such units as 9G01 and 3Q04, etc. after
135
connecting with gas pipes.

Sample gas: Pipe joint at Sample gas inletscram valvepipe joint at Sample gas
outletcalcium chloride pipe9G01
The flow of blowback gas circuit
Air 1: Wellsite compressed air interfacefiltering pressure-reducing valve To be filtered pipe
jointactive carbon pipesilicagel pipeconnect with the Filtered pipe jointquick
four-way valve Air outlet pipe jointactive carbon pipesilicagel pipe
scram valvesample gas inletoutdoor sample gas pipeline.
PE (bridge breaker)quick four-way union; The other three connections of the quick
four-way union will be connected to such units as 9G01 and 3Q04, etc. after connecting
with gas pipes.
Air 2: Pipe joint at Air compressor in the instrument roomquick four-way valvepipe joint at
Air outletactive carbon pipe
scram valvesample gas
inletoutdoor sample gas pipeline.
silicagel pipePE (bridge breaker)quick four-way union; The other three connections
of the quick four-way union will be connected to such units as 9G01 and 3Q04, etc. after
connecting with gas pipes.
Sample gas: Gasscram valevblockage.
Attention:
Either wellsite compressed air or air from air compressor in the instrument room can be
used.
Use
You can press the blowback button on the scram valve to clean pipeline through blowback
when vapor invades into the sample gas circuit or even mud is sucked into pipeline or the pressure
of vacuum gauge on cabinet panel is negative.
Sometimes, various additives will be added into drilling fluid due to engineering
requirements during drilling. After using some of the lipid additives with low fluorescent light for
a period, the gas pipeline will be contaminated seriously, especially, TG value is high for a long
time. In this condition, the blowback unit should be used to clean pipeline thoroughly during
tripping and the effect will be remarkable.
It's worth notice that one end of gas pipeline outside the instrument room should be
disconnected from drying cylinder, bridge breaker or sand-core filtering ball which are connected
to degasser to keep the gas pipeline smooth completely before performing blowback.
The time for blowback depends on the practical condition. If there is only vapor, maybe two
or three minutes will be enough; if the pipeline is dirty or contaminated by heavy hydrocarbon, the
time will be longer and maybe you should do it for more than one time. Once the blowback
operation is finished, a few minutes will be needed for the air compressor to restore pressure, so
136
you can press the blowback button to continue blowback after the pressure of air compressor is
increased. The pipeline will be cleaned thoroughly by repeating this operation as mentioned above
for several times.
Maintenance:
After the system is aerated, it is required to check whether leakage occurs in every valve,
pipe joint and gas pipe regularly (apply neutral detergent on joints and valves for test using pen
brush or paintbrush). If leakage occurs, the system should be readjusted. You can wrap the
connection again with pipe thread seal tape and screw it or replace the damaged or failed elements.
The drying agent of silicagel is contained in the gas circuit of this unit. When the compressed
air from outdoor wellsite is adopted, the active carbon should be used as filtering medium to
provide clean gas source for chromatograph and other units. But it is forbidden to use silicagel as
the drying agent in the drying cylinder of sample gas circuit due to the adsorption of silicagel
which will affect the gas survey data!
XXII Surveillance and Communication Equipment

XXII.1 SK-4S02 Video Camera
(a) Introduction
ZAT600 integrated explosion-proof video camera (hereafter refers to integrated machine) is a
compact, high-performance explosion-proof video surveillance device integrating explosion-proof
video camera, explosion-proof pan/tilt, and explosion-proof decoder box. The explosion-proof
performance of this machine complies with the national explosion-proof standards of GB3836-
2000 and GB12476.1-2000 regarding the mechanic and electric requirements. It is applicable to
the dangerous environments such as the environment with hydrogen gas (H2), hydrocarbon gas
(C2H2) and the flammable dust, etc. It is compact and convenient to install on site. An integrated
video camera or video camera with small zoom lens can be placed inside.
Please read the manual carefully before using the ZAT600 integrated machine, so as to ensure
the correct operation. Incorrect operation will give rise to abnormal operation and failure of
integrated machine or shorten the service life of machine, and even cause the physical injury
accident. Therefore, please read this manual again and again before using and comply with the
requirements strictly. This manual is an attachment provided together with the machine. Please
keep it properly after using so as to use it in repairing and maintenance of the integrated machine
in the future.
137
Notices for open-box inspection

When opening the box, please check carefully:
Whether there are damages caused during transportation;
whether the model and specification of the integrated
machine on the nameplate are consistent with your order.
If omissions or incompliances are identified, please
contact the supplier as soon as possible.
Model description Pan/tilt
Explosion-proof classification:
Base
Explosion-proof symbol: Exd II Guard
plate
shield
CT6 H2 /DIP A21 TA T6; Protection
class: IP65
Model
ZA T 600
Figure 6.1-1 External structure diagram
Product No.
Classification symbol
Company logo
External structure
External dimensions (LWH): 320mm300mm340mm.
Weight: 16Kg.
External structure diagram: As shown in Figure 6.1-1.
Safety notices
Definitions of Danger and Attention:
Danger: Operating not in compliance with the requirements will give rise to serious
equipment damage or physical injury.
Attention: Operating not in compliance with the requirements will give rise to moderate or
slight physical injury or property loss.
Installation
There should be professionals responsible for field installation.
Fix the base plate firmly.
Connect it to ground reliably.
Wiring
Danger
Professionals are required for the wiring operation. Otherwise, electric shock is
likely to occur.
Before wiring, the input power source should be disconnected completely.
Otherwise, electric shock is likely to occur.
The grounding terminals of the integrated machine should be connected to
138
ground reliably. Otherwise, electric shock is likely to occur..
Attention:
Dont connect the power input wire with video or communication wire
reversely; otherwise property damage is likely to occur.
There is an integrated cable of 2m attached to the ZAT600 integrated explosion-proof video

camera. The section of the integrated cable is as shown in Figure 6.1-2:
Blue: AC220V
Yellow: 485+
Video: +
White: 485-
Video:
Brown: AC220V
Figure 6.1-2: Cross section of the integrated cable
(b) Debugging
Dial code switch setting
Dial code switch SW1: 1-8 digits; Address: binary setup method; the dial codes for Address 1
to 65 are shown in Table 6.1-1 and the maximum number of Address is 255. (For other data, refers
to Attached Table 1)
Table 6.1-1: 1 represents ON and 0 represents OFF
Switch Switch Switch Switch Switch
position Address position Address position Address position Address position Address
12345678 12345678 12345678 12345678 12345678
10000000 1 01110000 14 11011000 27 00010100 40 10101100 53
01000000 2 11110000 15 00111000 28 10010100 41 01101100 54
11000000 3 00001000 16 10111000 29 01010100 42 11101100 55
00100000 4 10001000 17 01111000 30 11010100 43 00011100 56
10100000 5 01001000 18 11111000 31 00110100 44 10011100 57
01100000 6 11001000 19 00000100 32 10110100 45 01011100 58
11100000 7 00101000 20 10000100 33 01110100 46 11011100 59
00010000 8 10101000 21 01000100 34 11110100 47 00111100 60
10010000 9 01101000 22 11000100 35 00001100 48 10111100 61
01010000 10 11101000 23 00100100 36 10001100 49 01111100 62
11010000 11 00011000 24 10100100 37 01001100 50 11111100 63
139
00110000 12 10011000 25 01100100 38 11001100 51 00000010 64

10110000 13 01011000 26 11100100 39 00101100 52 10000010 65
As shown in Table 6.1-2, the 9-10 digits of the dial code switch SW1 are the corresponding baud
rate setting of the integrated machine.
Table 6.1-2
Dial code switch Baud rate
position bps
9 10
0 0 2400
1 0 4800
0 1 9600
1 1 19200
As shown in Table 6.1-3, the 11-12 digits of the dial code switch SW1 are the corresponding baud
rate setting of the video camera.
Table 6.1-3
Dial code switch Baud rate
position bps
11 12
0 0 2400
1 0 4800
0 1 9600
1 1 9600
Communication protocol
PELCO-D, PELCO-P or customized protocol. (The protocol is auto-adapted and not related to
the dial code switch).
(c) Operating principle

ZAT600 integrated explosion-proof video camera consists of power board, master control
board, lens control board, timing board and wiper control board. The power board powers the
whole system. The lens control board and timing board control the operation of lens and pan/tilt
through the master control board. The focus, focusing and aperture of video camera can be
controlled using the lens control board. The timing board controls the running of horizontal motor
and luffing motor. The wiper control board controls the wiper switch.
During normal operation, the indicators on the master control board, lens control board,
timing board and wiper control board are flashing slowly. The indicators will flash fast during
communication.
Connection description
Wiring for video camera
Open the front and real covers of guard shield to expose the lens board and wiper board as
shown in Figure 6.1-3:
Note: The wiper control board will be unavailable when wiper is not contained in the
140
instrument.
The lens control board will be unavailable when the RS485 interface is contained in video
camera. You only need to connect the 12V power wire to the RS485 communication
and video wires while wiring for video camera. The address of video camera is 2.
Baud rate can be set according to the 11-12 digits of dial code switch. The video
camera protocol is PELCO-D. (Depending on model of the video camera, the protocol
can be modified as required)
Figure 6.1-3
Wiring description:
The ports of 12V and GND should be connected to the power wire of video camera;
The ports of Focus, Zoom and Com should be connected to the focusing, zooming
and common port of video camera respectively.
Insert coaxial cable with BNC joint directly into the corresponding video output of
video camera.
Attention:
If there are some wires disassembled during wiring, you should connect them according to
the original status according to the color as shown in figure above.
Instruction for external wiring of power, control and video wires:
Unscrew the bottom cover of the base plate of video camera using tools to expose the
terminal block as shown in Figure 6.1-4:
141
1
5
ON
2 OFF 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
3 6
7
Figure 6.1-4
It is the dial code switch. For the specific dial method, refer to the section of dial code
switch setting.
Jumper terminal of terminal resistance (RS485 signal, 120 ohm).
Connection terminals of the integrated cable.
V0+: Connect to coaxial cable core.
V0-: Connect to shielding layer of the coaxial cable.
A: Connect to 485+.
B: Connect to 485-.
L, N: Power inlet terminal. Connect to AC220V.
2A/250V fuse.
Signal indicator.
Power indicator.
Connect to the timing board.
Connect to the control board.
Connect to the lens control board and wiper control board.
(d) Installation and Operation

Installation
The metal shell and frame of electric equipment should be connected to ground according to
the requirements of national electrical code. The ground wire should be thick and short and the
video camera system should be connected to the special grounding electrode.
The integrated machine should be installed firmly in the special bracket using corresponding
screws.
142
There should be professionals responsible for the installation.

Operation
Check and preparation before operation
Check whether the wiring is correct or not. Especially check whether the signal wire
of integrated machine is connected reversely with the power wire.
Ensure that there is no short circuit between terminals or to earth.
Ensure that the terminals, insert link connectors and screws are connected firmly.
Disconnect all switches before power on to make sure that the video camera will not
start and operate abnormally when power on.
Observe whether the self-check function of the integrated machine is normal and
whether noise appears in the internal mechanical structure of machine after power on.
Operation
If self-check is normal, check whether the integrated machine is controlled normally
using keyboard (or other control equipment) and whether the keyboard protocol and baud
rate are consistent with those of the integrated machine.
The general reasons for failure to control using keyboard with normal video are as
follows:
The address of keyboard is inconsistent with that of the integrated machine.
The protocol of keyboard is inconsistent with that of the integrated machine.
The baud rate of keyboard is inconsistent with that of the integrated machine.
RS-485 control wire is connected reversely.
Specific command description:
Area scan
Set up beginning point: Set up the presetting bit 128;
Set up ending point: Set up the presetting bit 129;
Start area scan: Invoke the presetting bit 130;
Automatic navigation:
Start trace 1: Invoke the presetting bit 49; Start trace 2: Invoke the presetting bit 50;
Start trace 3: Invoke the presetting bit 51; Start trace 4: Invoke the presetting bit 52;
Menu of video camera: (It is only available to the video camera with the function of
RS485 communication. It should be customized.)
Enter the menu of video camera: Invoke the presetting bit 67;
Exit the menu of video camera: Set up the presetting bit 67;
(e) Specification
Environment
The integrated machine will run normally under the following conditions:
Air pressure: 80KPa-106KPa;
Ambient temperature: -20~+60;
Relative humidity: 95%(+25)
Places with explosive gas and dust;
Performance indicators
Rotation angle:
Luffing: 0~90(2);
143
Horizon: 360 continuous rotation; With the presetting bit: 0360(2)

Rotary speed
Luffing: Max. 40/s;
Horizontal: Max. 40/s;
Supply voltage
AC220V85-265V 50/60Hz;
Operating current
Not greater than 0.5A (AC220V);
Protection class:
The protection class for sealed shell is IP65;
Communication
Communication mode: RS-485 semiduplex. The maximum transmission distance is
1200m;
Communication protocol: PELCO-D, PELCO-P, or customized protocol;
Communication speed: 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200 (adjustable);
Presetting bit: 128 presetting bits, accuracy 0.2; (other than the presetting bit of special
functions)
Automatic navigation:
4 groups, 16 navigation points in each group; Navigation residence time is 90s;
Area scan:
Group 1;
Electrical safety
The insulation resistance between the power and signal inlet terminals and the shell should
not be less than 100M.
(f) Packaging, transportation and storage
Packaging
Use the special packaging box. The following items should be contained in the packaging
box:
ZAT600 integrated explosion-proof video camera One
Instruction manual One
Product certificate One
Explosion-proof certificate One
Packing list One
Transportation
Notices for transportation:
The product should be transported with intact packaging and exposure to moisture and
rain is forbidden.
The products should be placed in order, compactly, reasonably and safely, so as to avoid
damages caused by shaking during transportation. It is forbidden to place products
upside down.
Products should not be placed in open ship or vehicle body during long distance
144
transportation and in open storage during transshipment on route. They should not be
loaded and transported together with the flammable, explosive and corrosive products
during transportation. It is forbidden to expose the product components to rain, snow or
liquid and the mechanical damage is also prohibited.
It is required to carry them gently and tumbling and inverting is strongly forbidden
during transportation.
The time of transshipment should be as few as possible. Products should be
loaded/unloaded in good condition. Mechanical operation should be adopted for the
main transportation and handling to prevent brutal handling.
Storage
Valid period is half a year since packaging. During this period, the storage storing
products should be of good ventilation and the concentration of acid, alkaline and other
harmful gas in air should meet the requirement of environmental policy.
All packaging boxes should be moisture resistant, i.e., the stands supporting packaging
boxes should be placed at least 30cm above ground and 40cm from wall.
The packaging boxes should be placed strictly according to the storage and
transportation diagram on box and the placing layers should not exceed the limit layer
of each box.
The packaged product should be brought to use immediately after acceptance or the
time for storage and transportation should not exceed half a year. After reaching the
destination, the box should be opened within 3 months.
(g) Check and Maintenance
Summary of regular inspection
Ta r g e t Inspection
Item inspected Standard
inspected method
1. Inspect the temperature, 1. Visual 1. Comply with
humidity, vibration and water inspection or the technical
drop of the ambient environment. use instrument. specification.
Ambient environment
2. No foreign matter and 2. Visual 2. No related
dangerous articles such as tools inspection. articles are
are placed around. placed.
Whether the voltage of main Visual Comply with
Voltage circuit and control circuit is inspection or the technical
normal? use instrument. specification.
Bracket and sun shade, 1. Is there any abnormal sound 1. Visual There is no
etc. and vibration? inspection and abnormal
2. Whether the screws and other listening. situation for the
fasteners are loosened? 2. Screw up. three items.
3. Is there any deformation? 3. Visual
145
inspection.
1. Is there any peculiar smell and 1. Screw up There is no
insulator cracking due to 2. Visual abnormal
For public use overheating? inspection. situation for the
2. Is there any disconnection? two items.
1. Is there any color change and Visual There is no

Output
deformation of conductor due to inspection. abnormal
circuit
Conductor overheating? situation for the
2. Is there any breakage or color two items.
change of the wire layer?
Is there any damage? Visual There is no
Terminal
inspection. abnormal
block
situation.
1. Whether the screws and 1. Screw up There is no
connectors are loosened? 2. Visual abnormal
2. Is there any peculiar smell and inspection and situation for the
color change? smelling. four items.
3. Is there any cracks, breakage, 3. Visual
Signal Connection of deformation and corrosion? inspection.
circuit control circuit 4. Whether the micro switch is 4. Visual
damaged? inspection,
estimate service
life according
to maintenance
information.
Notices for maintenance:

Maintenance, inspection and replacement should be performed by the designated operators;
Take off watch, ring and other metal articles before operating and use the insulating tools
during operation.
Ensure the power supply is cut off before opening chamber or guard shield;
Ground wire should be connected properly when the integrated machine is used.
146
XXII.2 SK-4X03 Multi-function Display

Overview
SK-4X03 multi-function display is the new generation of explosion-proof display released by
Shanghai Shenkai Science & Technology Engineer Co., Ltd. This product integrates the industry-
leading 17 wide-temperature and ultra-bright LCD screen with the high brightness of 1000lm, the
excellent contrast of 500:1 and the broad visual angle of 120 outdoors and 180 indoors. Except
for the VGA analog input mode, you can also select the video input mode. It possesses the all
stainless steel structure and the airtight, water-proof, dust-proof, anti-vibration and impact-
resistant characteristic. With convenient operation and small size, SK-4X03 multi-function display
can be widely applied to the places with flammable and explosive gas for video display, such as
oil field, drilling platform, gas station, downhole coal mining and chemical plant, etc.
Guard
shield
Angle adjust knob of guard
shield
Angle adjust knob of

screen
17 TFT LCD screen
Stand type
installation carrier
Four-core power VGA video cable

cable
Figure 6.2-1 Appearance of SK-4X03 multi-function display
147
Unlike domestic products of similar type, this explosion-proof display adopts restricted
breathing structure design. Compared with the common isolated type explosion-proof display, this
display features small size and light weight. It is convenient to operate with the novel front door
opening structure and various types of installation carriers are available such as stand and bench
type. It will be equipped and installed by our company according to the specific requirements of
users.
Ambient temperature: -20 ~ 50
Storage temperature: -30 ~ 60
Relative humidity: <90%
Structure characteristics: All stainless
steel structure and resistance to dust, rain,
corrosion and explosion.
External dimensions: 462391185mm
Display area: 336264mm
Weight: 23Kg (not including installation carrier)
Screen: 17 TFT
Point interval: 0.297mm
Maximum resolution: 12801024
Scanning frequency: Horizontal: 30~70KHz; Vertical: 56~85Hz
Color: 256K
Luminance: 400cd/m2
Contrast: 500:1
Horizontal visual angle: 70/70
Vertical visual angle: 50/70
Signal input: Analog type: R.G.B/VIDEO
Signal interface: 15-hole D-type socket /video plug
Explosion-proof structure: Restricted breathing explosion-proof structure,
compliant with the national standard of
GB/3836.8-200
SK-4X03 multi-function display which adopts the restricted breathing explosion-proof
structure can meet various explosion-proof requirements of Zone 2 dangerous places.
Restricted breathing explosion-proof system
The shell of SK-4X03 multi-function display is designed according to the requirements
of restricted breathing shell. Gas tightness requirements: 80s after the positive pressure gas of
300Pa flowing into shell, the remaining gas pressure in cabinet should be not less than 150Pa.
148
Generally, the seal structure of shell prevents the flammable gas entering into shell, so as to
meet the explosion-proof requirements. The protection class of the restricted breathing shell
should be not less than IP65 and this shell can be used in Zone 2.
4. Electric wiring
Power connecting wire (from power cable reel to switching power supply)
Three-hole plug of power YZW30.75 cable XS18K3CI XS18J3CI 220V input
cable reel 100m terminals of
switching power
supply
L Brown 2 2 L
N Blue 3 3 N
E Yellow-green 1 1 E
Video signal connecting wire (from video signal cable reel to control board)
DB15 plug of VGA video XS18K14CI XS18J14YC VGA video cable DB15 plug Remarks
video cable cable 15m connecting to the (Functions)
reel 60m control board

1 Red 1 1 Red 1 Red
6 Shield (red) 2 2 Shield (red) 6 GND
3 Green 3 3 Green 2 Green
8 Shield 4 4 Shield (green) 7 GND
(green)
2 Blue 5 5 Blue 3 Blue
7 Shield 6 6 Shield (blue) 8 GND
(blue)
5 White 7 7 White 5 GND
4 General Shell Shell general shield 4 Shield shell
shield
12 Brown 8 8 Brown 12 GND
13 Black 9 9 Black 13 HS
14 Yellow 10 10 Yellow 14 VS
15 Green 11 11 Green 15 GND
9 Orange 12 12 Orange 9 GND
149
RCA plug of 75 75 coaxial cable RCA socket Remarks

video cable coaxial 15m connecting to the (Functions)
reel cable control board
100m
Weld pin of Cores 13 13 Cores Weld pin of centre CORE
centre plug plug
Shell Shield 14 14 Shield Shell GND
Attention:
For the video cable of different specifications, the number of cable cores and the color may be
different, so the method of pin connection shall prevail for connecting.
The colors in the above table are only used for reference.
If there is no specific instruction on the length of connecting cable, the actual cable length shall
prevail.
When connecting, you should pass the video cable through the cabinet of the multi-function
display first and tie it in the cabinet to prevent loosening, and then put on the EMI toroidal
magnetic core.
Figure 6.2-3 Installation position diagram of SK-4X03 components
150
Heat conduction
silicagel should be
set on inversion
plate
LCD
screen
Fan
assembly. It
is the fan
with 12V
power LVDS wire
supply.
Figure 6.2-4 Installation of inversion plate, LCD screen and fan
Figure 6.2-5 Field connection diagram of SK-4X03 device
151
XXII.3 Installation of Program-control Telephone

The built-in program-control telephone exchanger in SK-CMS mud logging units can connect 7
telephone sets at most, including 1 programmable telephone set installed in the logging unit and 6
remote telephone sets installed in the office, sampling room and supervision room, etc. Connect lines of
the 6 remote telephone sets to 6 groups of interfaces of the explosion-proof junction box in the back
cabin of the mud logging unit respectively.
Remote telephone multi-function display CAN bus cable
CMS power out constant temperature multi-function display

CMS power in heater band power
engine degasser power

Figure 4.3-1 Schematic diagram of junction box
The local number

200 is displayed on
the screen
Figure 4.3-2 Programmable telephone set in the mud logging unit
There are totally 6 groups of interfaces in the remote telephone junction box, with each two
adjacent lines as a group beginning from the left end. Connect according to the default setting. The
corresponding phone numbers of the 6 groups of interfaces should be 201, 202, 203, 204, 205 and 206
respectively from left to right and the default number of the programmable telephone in logging unit is
200. If you forget the number of one remote telephone after connection, you can dial the programmable
telephone (the number is 200) in logging unit using this telephone, then the number of this remote
152
telephone will be displayed on the programmable telephone.
XXII.4 Installation of External Display

After all sensors are installed properly, install the displays in the offices of drilling supervisor,
geology supervisor and platform manager according to configured quantity.
Installation and connection methods
Take out the cable reel of 75m video line provided together with the device, insert one end of the
cable reel into the video socket on the cabinet junction box behind the logging unit, pull the other end
into the offices of drilling supervisor and geology supervisor and connect the display.
Chapter V Operation Guide for Gas Survey

XXIII Auxiliary equipment for gas survey
XXIII.1 SK-9Q400Z hydrogen generator
Overview
153
SK-9Q400Z hydrogen generator is applicable to various types of gas chromatographs, hydrogen

flame ionization detectors (FID) and other units requiring high-purity hydrogen gas. It can also be used
for hydrogen producing and hydrogenation test in medicine and semiconductor industry. And it is
indispensable equipment for scientific research, production, analysis and inspection sectors such as
petroleum exploration, medicine, food, chemical industry, environmental protection, agroforestry and
national defense and so on.
Figure 5.1-1 Analysis theoretic diagram of hydrogen generator

Main technical indicators
Hydrogen production: 0-400ml/min
Output pressure: 0.4MPa
+10%
Optional power supply: alternating current 220V -20% ; Frequency: 505HZ
The temperature of working environment is 5-40 and the humidity is 35-90% (relative
humidity)
Consumed power: 400W
Weight: 18Kg
External dimensions: L470B185H420mm
Installation and transportation
This hydrogen generator shall be placed and used in the environment without flammable,
explosive and corrosive gas.
The temperature of working environment is 5-40 and the humidity is 35-90% (relative
humidity).
When running, it shall be placed flat and close to the instrument or equipment using
hydrogen gas as much as possible. The clearance of not less than 40mm shall be left on the
left, right and back of it.
The electrolytic solution in the fluid storage container shall be emptied before transportation.
It is required to avoid relatively large declination, shock and vibration in the course of
transporting.
Use and operation
Startup preparations
Preparation of electrolytic solution
The electrolytic solution is prepared with water and potassium hydroxide. The
154
concentration of potassium hydroxide is 10%.For example, 1600ml (distilled water) +

160g (potassium hydroxide), mix homogenously;
Water quality requirement: the electrolytic solution shall be prepared with distilled water or
deionized water; if it is prepared with other water for a long time, the accumulative and
irreversible damages will be brought to the generator. Our company has purchased parts and
stainless electrically-heated distilling apparatus (the water output is 5l/h; the power is 4.5
kilowatt) in stock;
Electrolyte requirement: chemically pure potassium hydroxide (or sodium hydroxide) shall be
used.
Filling-up electrolytic solution:
Unplug the plastic cover of liquid adding port (see Figure 5.1-2), slowly fill up the
electrolytic solution into the fluid storage container by a plastic funnel and observe the display
window on the panel. The liquid level should not exceed the upper limit (red line) of liquid
level tube and the volume of fluid storage container is about 1600ml.The operation of filling-up
electrolytic solution shall be conducted with care and if the alkali liquor sprinkles outside and
inside the generator, it will damage the generator.
Connecting the waste pipe:
Insert the PU pipe of f 5.5 in diameter (spare parts) into the blow-off joint and lead
outdoors (see Figure 5.1-2)
Figure 5.1-2 Appearance drawing of SK-9Q400Z hydrogen generator

Startup operation
Start up the generator ten minutes after adding the electrolytic solution.
Check before startup and start up if there is no exceptional situations; set the switch valve
under the rear plate to On position (anticlockwise) (see Figure 5.1-2);
Plug in and switch in the power switch, then the switch indicator (red) lights up, the
blowing fan noise can be heard, and the working parameters and status such as Hydrogen
pressure , Hydrogen yield and Water level are displayed in the liquid crystal screen;
155
Close the switch valve after generating hydrogen for 3 minutes, namely set the switch
valve to Off position (clockwise), then observe the displayed value of Hydrogen
pressure on the liquid crystal screen and the pressure of hydrogen gas shall rise to 0.4MPa
within 5 minutes and at the same time, the displayed value of Hydrogen yield decreases
to 0, indicating the generator runs normally and here it can be connected to the
equipment using hydrogen gas. The hydrogen delivery outlet adopts f 3 stainless-steel
tube, seal ring of f 3 hole and screw nut and it is connected to the equipment using
hydrogen gas (spare parts);
After connecting, first flush the pipeline, close the switch valve after the generator
generating hydrogen gas for 3 minutes to make its pressure rise to 0.4MPa and open the
switch valve to blow off hydrogen gas in the pipeline. Repeat the pressure rise and
hydrogen blow-off operations for 2-3 times. Until what in the system is basically hydrogen
gas.
This generator carries out automatically constant pressure (0.4MP) and constant current of
hydrogen gas. The electrolyzer produces hydrogen changing with hydrogen consumption
and the electrolyzer runs continuously, supplying gas as it is produced. The indicating
value of hydrogen production meter is the value of hydrogen consumption.
Shutdown operation
When stopping using the hydrogen gas, first close the switch valve and then cut off the
power supply, keeping the hydrogen status;
When using the hydrogen gas, first switch in the power switch and then open the switch
valve to produce and supply hydrogen gas.
Maintenance
The generator produces hydrogen gas using the method of water electrolysis and it should be
noticed to add the water used for electrolysis as the water is used and consumed and when the
water drops below the lower limit of liquid level, it is required to add the distilled water (or
deionized water, ultra-filtered pure water) to the fluid storage container. For the operating
method, see startup preparation: filling-up electrolytic solution. If the water used for
electrolysis is not added, the alarm of low water level will be given (it is still producing and
supplying hydrogen gas at this moment, the Water level indication on the liquid crystal
screen switches from Normal to Over-low and is flashing). The generator will self-protect
and stop producing hydrogen due to shortage of water if the water used for electrolysis is not
added any more after ten minutes. It should be operated as follows:
Cut off the power supply;
Add the distilled water;
Switch in the power supply, the Water level indication on the liquid crystal screen is
Normal, continue to produce hydrogen.
If the color of electrolytic solution changes, it is roily and the hydrogen yield decreases after it
is used for a while, it is required to replace with new electrolytic solution (it is recommended to
replace the electrolytic solution once every three months).
The allochroic silicagel in the drying cylinder changes from light blue to light pink, showing it
has been damp due to absorbing water and replacement is required when the color of 2/3
allochroic silicagel changes. Replacement operation:
Cut off the power supply, bleed off the hydrogen gas, unscrew the drying cylinder
anticlockwise and then lift upwards and take it out.
Anticlockwise unscrew the light gray plastic sealing cover in the upper. Take out the cotton
and put out the damp silica gel.
Put in the dry silica gel, put in the cotton and screw up the sealing cover (screw up as much
156
as possible).
Restore the drying cylinder, screw in the sealing socket. Dont screw in too tight and it is
ok if no gas leaks.
Desorption treatment of silica gel: the damp silica gel is put in the electric heating oven and the
temperature is controlled at about 120.Take it out when the color of silica gel
becomes blue, cool it down to normal temperature and put it in the bottle for use.
Ensure the generator works normally and the air tightness of the whole gas circuit is vital. Due
to limited hydrogen production, gas leakage will give rise to increase in the addition load,
which will cause damage to generator. Please pay attention to air tightness in the operations of
connecting gas pipes and replacing silica gel and so on.
Notice
The generator produces hydrogen gas using the method of water electrolysis and it should be
noticed to add the water used for electrolysis as the water is used and consumed and when the
water drops below the lower limit of liquid level, it is required to add the distilled water.
The electrolytic tank is the heart of generator and users are not allowed to disassemble it to
prevent the electrolytic tank from unrecoverable damage. Please contact the production plant if
problems are found. The user should be responsible for the damage caused by self-dismounting
(even in warranty period).
The electrolytic solution in the fluid storage container should be emptied first before
transporting the generator to avoid the external overflow of electrolytic solution to damage the
generator. The electrolytic solution in the fluid storage container is emptied by using the ear
syringe ball (accessory).
The water storage barrel is positive potential and it cannot be interconnected to other
components.
In order to ensure the generator runs safely, users cannot adjust the pressure at random to avoid
abnormal operation.

Failures Causes Elimination and solving methods
After switching in the power a. Plug and socket of power wires a. Replace or repair the plug socket
switch, the indicator of power contact poorly. b. Replace the fuse (the nominal
supply (red lamp) is not on. The b. The fuse is broken. value is 5A).
fan doesnt work. c. The power switch is damaged. c. Replace the switch.
Buzzer alarm
a. After adding the water, cut off the
a. Be accompanied by water
a. Shortage of water (water used for power supply and then switch in the
level indicator flashing
electrolysis) power supply.
b. Be accompanied by
b. Excessive pressure of hydrogen gas b. Failures occur to the pressure flow
Hydrogen pressure indicator
controller.
flashing
Produce hydrogen, but no Eliminate the blockage in the drying
Some place is blocked.
hydrogen gas is output. cylinder or other pipeline
The hydrogen yield is Apply the soap fluid to suspectable
400ml/min for a long time, or it places, drying cylinder and joints.
Leakage occurs in some place.
is larger than the actual Reinstall or replace the sealing O-
hydrogen consumption. shaped ring.
The hydrogen yield decreases a. Large hydrogen consumption for a
and the color of electrolyte long time Replace the electrolyte.
changes and it is roily. b. Normal consumption
157
XXIII.2 SK-9K06-II oilless silenced air compressor

Purpose
SK-9K06-II series oilless air compressor is a new product developed by our company. Compared
with products of some type at home and abroad, it has features of oilless, light weight, low noise, small
volume and high energy efficiency. It is widely used in the world, and in the fields of scientific research,
medical treatment and industry and is the ideal gas source for laboratory, metering room and computer
machine tool in the consulting room in the hospital.
Technical parameters
Table 5.1-1
Name SK-9K06
Discharge volume 0.07
(M3/min)
Working pressure 0.10.8
(MPa)
Motor power (W) 500
Supply voltage (V) 220
Rotation speed (r/min) 1400
Noise (db) <60
Volume of air cylinder 0.018
(M3)
Weight (kg) 24.5
External dimensions f 400700
(LWH)
Ambient temperature 050
()
Motor
Power switch
Portable position
Portable position
Air output valve

Silencer Output pressure adjusting valve
Output pressure gauge

Drainage outlet Gas cylinder
Figure 5.1-3 Structural diagram of SK-9K06-II air compressor
Use and operation

Check whether the air filter has been hitched at the air entrance in the back cabin of the mud
logging unit to prevent the larger particle dust from being sucked into the compressor. Check
whether PE filter has been connected to the output end to prevent macromolecular impurities
from entering the chromatograph (Figure 5.1-4).
158
Air filter
Figure 5.1-4 Filter at the air entrance of air compressor

Connect the power supply, the machine starts to run, the pressure of pressure gauge rises from
0MPa to the set value of 0.8MPa, the pressure-controlled switch automatically releases and the
machine stops running. Open the air release valve, the pressure decreases to 0.4MPa and the
machine re-starts to run.
Connect the high-pressure hose of 3/8 in inner diameter to the deflating valve, fasten it with a
collar clamp, another end is connected to the machine tool, conduct the leak test and start up
until automatic stop; check the seal on joints with soapy water and air leak is not allowed,
observe the pressure gauge and it can be used only after its drop is less than 0.05MPa/min.
It is not allowed to run the machine continuously for over 30 minutes.
This machine can drive only a machine tool to work. If overload, it will damage this machine
and you will be responsible for the consequence alone.
If power off suddenly, off-load electromagnetic reversing valve of this machine will release the
pressure and gas, which is convenient for reload and re-startup after restoring the power supply.
After finishing the work, it is required to pull out the plug of power supply and blow down once
a week.
In the course of running, it is required to check whether leaks occur to joints if the pressure
rises very slowly or cannot maintain the required pressure.
When running continuously, good ventilation shall be available, otherwise the compressor will
stop automatically due to overheat and it can run after cooling.
Notice
The machine shall be used in the dry, clean and good-ventilation environment in the room and
it is not allowed to use it in the flammable and explosive enclosed places;
The working voltage of this machine is AC power supply, single phase 220V10%; Frequency:
50HZ;
The machine runs within the specified pressure range, the
maximum pressure of silenced gas pump has been adjusted as 0.8MPa
when leaving factory and it is not allowed to run at maximum pressure
and the pressure of safety valve is 0.9MPa.
Attention: It is required to drain with pressure at least once a
week!
XXIII.3 SK-7R02 thermovacuum distilling degasser

Principle
Gas logging is an important approach to search for hydrocarbon
resources in the petroleum exploration. And in the gas logging, the
Figure 5.1-5
degassing efficiency of mud has direct affects analytic precision of gas
samples and accuracy and reliability of data interpretation. An extremely high degassing efficiency can
159
be obtained using the thermovacuum distilling degasser. When the gas-oil ratio is low, the drilling speed
is low and the mud is dense with large specific gravity, the floater or engine degasser is used and the
extremely small amount of gas degassed may leak to the oil and gas layers. However, a better effect will
be obtained using the thermovacuum distilling degasser. In combination with analysis of
chromatographic analyzer, it will provide reliable basis for qualitative and quantitative interpretation of
oil and gas layers. Gas contained in the mud exists in the forms of liberation, dissolution and absorption.
Methods of heating, mixing and pressure relief are used to make the gas in the mud expand and
volatilize in great deal and almost all gas is separated.
Features
Compared with SK-7R01 or other products of similar type, SK-7R02 thermovacuum full degasser
has the following features.
Compact structure and beautiful appearance;
The volume of mud bottle is 250 ml and the mud for analysis is also determined as 250 ml;
For the mud for analysis, the fresh mud is filled in the mud bottle at the outlet trough and then
the sealed cover is placed immediately;
Replace the round bottom flask with stainless-steel mud bottle, thoroughly eliminating the
hidden danger from explosion of glass bottle and improving the safety.
Degree of vacuum of system: 1.3KPa;
Pumping speed: 1ml/s;
Leakproofness of system: after the degree of vacuum reaches 1.3KPa, cut off the atmos valve
for 2h and the vacuum gauge will drop not more than 0.26KPa by visual inspection.
Heating power: 300W;
Volume of mud bottle: 250ml.
Installation
SK-7R02 thermovacuum distilling degasser consists of gas cylinder, main body for degassing, mud
bottle, heating stirrer, vacuum pump, oil bottle and saline bottle filled with saturated saline water and so
on. Users can assemble the instruments according to graphic presentation (Figure 5.1-6).
Gas cylinder: consist of vapor metering cylinder and glass bottle with round bottom. Used for
metering and storing the gas separated from the mud.
Main body for degassing: consist of vacuum gauge, observation window and three valves.
Realize and control the gas degassing.
Stirrer: used for heating and stirring the mud to improve the degassing efficiency.
Mud bottle: used to store and heat mud. The volume is 250ml.
160
Figure 5.1-6 Schematic diagram of installation

Use and operation
Connection
Store the mud. Fill fresh mud in the mud bottom at the mud outlet trough, select a magnetic
bar according to the density of mud and put it in the mud bottle (put in a large magnetic bar
for mud of large density and a small magnetic bar for mud of small density), place the sealed
cover and screw up the adapter.
Switch valve B to Pump position (the main body is interconnected to the vacuum pump),
switch valve A to Gas collection (gas cylinder is interconnected to main body), switch
valve C to Mud bottle (the main body is interconnected to the mud bottle).
Connect the pipeline. Connect pipelines for the saline bottle, main body and vacuum pump
according to the drawing (Figure 5.1-7) (connect the adapter labeled with Vacuum pump
on rear of main body to that of oil tank on the pump using three plastic pipes; put two
adapters labeled with Saline bottle in two saline bottles filled with saturated saline water.
Where, the saline water in the saline bottle connecting to valve A is used repeatedly but that
to valve C is used only once.
Figure 5.1-7 Schematic diagram of pipeline connecting
Attention:
If the degassing requirement is not high, users can replace saturated saline water with fresh water.
161
Ready to vacuumize. Anticlockwise rotate the conical head to make the pricking pin not
exposing the end of conical head; then apply silicone grease on the conical head (improving
the seal between the conical head and mud bottle), place the mud bottle in the conical head
and slight support upwards by hand (Please note to compact upwards to make the mud bottle
not to drop and the purpose of this step is to keep the mud bottle and conical head in sealing
status).
Vacuumize
Start up the vacuum pump to vacuumize to make the pressure gauge stabilize below
-0.09MPa and here the main body and air cylinder are in the vacuum status.
Switch valve A to Off.
Switch valve B to Off, close the pump and pull out the plastic pipe labeled with connection
to vacuum pump (avoid oil reversing out from the oil tank).
Degassing preparation
Slowly switch valve A to Saline water to connect the gas cylinder to saline bottle and quickly
switch valve A to Off after the height of saline water in the round bottom bottle is 2-3cm.
Degassing
Clockwise rotate upwards the conical head to the end to make the conical head pierce mud
sealing cover. Then put the heating stirrer in the tray (the tray is in the lower position), put it
at the bottom of mud bottle, loosen the lock nut in the upper of bracket of main body and
adjust the height to make the bottom of mud bottle close to the heating stirrer, screw up the
lock nut and adjust the height of tray on the heating stirrer through the spanner (handle)
below the tray to make the mud bottle seat on the heating stirrer.
Start up the heating stirrer, rotate stirring and temperature control knobs to certain position,
heat and stir the mud and gas continuously escapes from the mud; when the pressure is up to
-0.07MPa, switch valve A to Gas storage to make the gas cylinder connect to the main
body and mud bottle, continue heating, distill and degas until the pressure of pressure gauge
gradually rises to -0.06MPa and shut down the heater.
Gas collection
Switch valve C to Saline water, interconnect the saline bottle to the main body, the liquid
level in the observation window rises quickly and the saturated saline water squeezes the gas
to gas cylinder; when the liquid level rises near to the top of observation window, quickly
switch valve C to Mud bottle.
Switch valve A to Saline water to interconnect the gas cylinder to the saline bottle, the
saturated saline water squeezes gas to metering cylinder to make the water level in round
bottom bottle and metering cylinder rise, and after the pressure balance, what in the top of
metering cylinder is gas degassed.
Sampling
Extract gas from the top of metering cylinder using an injector and then inject into the
chromatographic analyzer for analysis. If the quantity of gas in the metering cylinder is inadequate for
analysis, a certain quantity of air can be injected and mixed with sample gas to be used for analysis. It
will be converted after analysis.
Washing
Unscrew the top cover of metering cylinder or pierce into the top of metering cylinder using
an injection needle to blow off excessive gas to make the saline water in the gas cylinder
return to the saline bottle.
Switch valve A to Gas collection, switch valve C to Saline water to interconnect the
main body to the saline bottle and discharge the water in the observation window to the
wastewater trough. Unscrew the cover of observation window and wash.
Unscrew the metering cylinder and round bottom bottle and wash them.
162
Remove the heater; take down the mud bottle using special tools and wash it.
Screw up the top cover of metering cylinder, apply a small amount of silicon ester where is
sealed, install the metering cylinder and round bottom bottle, replace the mud bottle,
approximately supplement the saline water to the saline bottle and prepare the next mud
sample.
Table 5.1-2 Table of valve positions (front view of main body)
Valve Valve position Explanation to the status
name
Gas collection (upper) Interconnect the gas cylinder to the main body
Valve A Off (middle) Close passageways of main body, gas cylinder and
saline bottle.
Saline water (lower) Interconnect the gas cylinder to the saline bottle.
Pump (upper) Interconnect the main body to oil tank and vacuum
pump.
Valve B
Off (lower) Close passageways of main body, oil tank and
vacuum pump.
Mud bottle (right) Interconnect the main body to the mud bottle.
Valve C
Saline water (left) Interconnect the main body the saline bottle.
Attachment: Summary of operating guide of SK-7R02

Table 5.1-3
Step Functional
Operation Operation instruction
number description
Set valve A to Gas
collection, valve B to
Vacuum and valve C to
First step Connection Mud bottle
Connect pipelines
Put the mud bottle in the
conical head.
Start up the vacuum pump Vacuumize
Switch valve A to Off and When the pressure of pressure gauge is lower
Second step Vacuumize then switch valve B to Off than -0.09MPa
Shut down the vacuum Finish extracting the system and air in the inlet
pump pipe.
Slowly switch valve A to
Absorb saline water
Degassing Saline water
Third step
preparation Quickly switch valve A to When the height of saline water in the round
Off bottom bottle is 2-3cm
Rotate the conical casing Pierce the cover of mud bottle
Start up the heater Heat and stir the mud
Fourth step Degassing Switch valve A to Gas When the pressure of vacuum gauge rises to
collection -0.07MPa
When the pressure of vacuum gauge
Shut down the heater
continuously rises to -0.06MPa
Switch valve C to Saline
Gas collection
water
Gas Quickly switch valve C to When the liquid level in the observation
Fifth step
collection Mud bottle window is close to the top
Switch valve A to Saline
Gas collection
water
Extract gas sample from the When the liquid level in the metering cylinder
Sixth step Sampling metering cylinder using an doesnt rise any more after the absorption of
injector saline water balances
Seventh Washing Unscrew the top cover of
step metering cylinder
163
Switch valve C to the

position getting through to Discharge the wastewater
saline bottle
Unscrew the cover of
Wash with fresh water
observation window
XXIV Equipment for gas survey

XXIV.1 Operation of SK-3Q04 hydrogen flame chromatograph
Please read the following precautions before installing and using the instrument.
Safe use of electricity
The connection method of the power wire used in this instrument is single-phase tri-wire
system, where, the ground line must connect to the ground firmly except phase line and null
line. And the ground line should be pitched into the underground about 2m (made of metal
iron bar f 20mm or angle steel 30mm).The null line cant be used as a ground line;
The power supply used in this instrument is single phase 220V, 50Hz. The voltage value,
polarity and power, etc. of the power supply network should be checked before moving the
instrument or replacing the plug and socket of power supply. They can be connected into the
instrument only when they are proved to meet the requirements;
Pay attention to the requirement when replacing the fuse of power supply. The specific
specifications can be found in the instruction. Or carefully check the specification of the
replaced fuse, and replace it with fuse of the same specification;
During maintenance, if it is necessary to disassemble the cover panel of the instrument,
attention must be paid to that the plug socket of power supply has been disconnected.
The working procedure of the instrument is fixed. Please dont alter it at will.
Prevent from scalding
There exists heating temperature when the instrument FID and chromatographic column with a
furnace are working, and there is no time for the temperature disseminating when shutdown for
maintenance, so attention should be paid to preventing from scalding accident.
Safe use of gas
When using he hydrogen generator while the instrument is working, evacuate the hydrogen
gas outdoors.
Check the gas circuit of quick chromatograph for any leakage strictly to ensure there is no
leakage.
Hydrogen generator consumes water after producing hydrogen, so deionized water or
distilled water should be added when the water level is lower than the alarm point. The
added water should not exceed the upper limit water line.
The water in the gas cylinder of the air compressor should be discharged frequently, and the
drain valve should be shut off after the water has been discharged.
Normal operation of the system
The pressure, flow and analysis cycle (the retention time of C 1-C5 gas components) have
been adjusted when the instrument leaves factory and it is unnecessary for users to make any
adjustment.
The pre-treatment system such as glass sand-core filtering ball and filter element at the input
end of sample gas should be replaced frequently (for the replacement method, see the
relative contents of the instruction) to ensure the system works normally.
Sample pipeline is usually exposed to pollution from the hydrosphere. Pipeline back-blowing
should be performed if any pollution is identified.
Touch screen setting
164
Be sure to keep the touch screen clean, and dont operate the system with oil stained hands.
To ensure reliable work of the system, please use the operation pen of touch screen to set
operation conditions or communicate externally.
Data uploading
3Q04 chromatograph will stop real-time sampling and real-time data communication when
uploading data files; it only performs data files transmission. 3Q04 will restore to the normal
operation automatically after finishing data files transmission. Dont transmit files under
normal operating condition to prevent from missing logging. The main interface is not
updated in real time in the course of file upload when the status interface can be viewed.
The background software can save chromatographic data in real time, and the storage format
is the same as the uploading format, therefore, data uploading is just used as a means of
backup.
When the program runs normally, the data transmission mode can be selected and
Autoexec.bat under DOS can be modified as C:\3q04\3Q04 parameter (Parameter=0: network
transmission mode; =0: serial port transmission mode; =2: network+serial port transmission
mode)
It is suggested to use network transmission mode under favorable condition to transmit data
(versions after v3.00).
(a) Product overview
SK-3Q04 hydrogen flame chromatograph is used for real-time measurement of natural gas in the
field of petroleum drilling and exploration. Its features are to provide two analysis modes for C 1-C5
components of oil and natural gas with two analysis cycles: 30s and 90s.SK-3Q04 hydrogen-flame
chromatographic analyzer consists of SK-9G01 sample pretreatment unit and SK-3Q04 hydrogen flame
chromatograph. The panel of instrument is concise and gas circuit part of analysis unit includes VMS
injection port, carrier gas pressure gauge and sample gas pressure gauge; the measuring control part
includes liquid crystal screen and power switch only. All the dialogues are carried out through the touch
keyboard/display, the large-screen TFT liquid crystal display is adopted and it can display much
information such as analysis status, control process, FID operation and chromatographic data
processing, qualitative and quantitative process, analysis results and chromatograph charts, etc.
Attention: SK-3Q04 hydrogen flame chromatograph is a fast chromatograph. The output
modes by recording instrument and integraph are reserved and it is recommended to use the mode of
electronic record. Shenkai Company has specially developed the mode of no-paper record and provides
the corresponding software support. Traditional recorder uses the mechanic drive mode, which is easy to
underdo or overdo in the case of rapid signal response, giving rise to relatively large signal distortion.
So please use it with caution.
(b) Operating principle
An instrument manufactured on the principle of gas chromatograph, SK-3Q04 hydrogen flame
chromatograph can obtain on line natural gas samples degassed from the mud degasser, separate them
in the chromatographic column and get qualitative and quantitative data of compounds from the
detector.
Gas chromatograph uses the gas as flowing phase (carrier gas); after being injected through an
injector or imported to the quantitative tube (sample injector) through sample pump, samples are
carried to the chromatographic column by carrier gas. Due to slight difference in solubility factor of
various components of sample in the flowing phase (gas phase) and fixed phase (liquid phase) in the
chromatographic column, various components, flushed by carrier gas, repeatedly dissolve, volatilize
and distribute in the two phases to make them separated in the chromatographic column. Then
components are detected according to their outflow time using detector after the column.
Separating method
165
The separating column of SK-3Q04 hydrogen flame chromatograph consists of SK-1360

chromatographic column and a set of SK-1360 fast chromatographic column includes two columns:
column 1 (known as pretreatment column) and column 2 (known as primary separating column).After
components of natural gas are carried to the chromatographic column by carrier gas, components of
natural gas are absorbed or desorbed by the fixed phase as the carrier gas continuously flows due to
different distributing capacity of C1-C5 compounds of natural gas in the gas phase and fixed phase of
chromatographic column, giving rise to slight difference in the distribution coefficient and this
difference enlarges continuously. Finally compounds are separated in the chromatographic column.
Component analysis flow of SK-3Q04 is double-column, single quantitative tube and single-flow
gas circuit structure and the blowback of heavy components is also included in the whole analysis cycle.
For its schematic diagram of separating system, see Figure 5.2-1.
Figure 5.2-1 Schematic diagram of SK-3Q04 separating system

Attention:
SK fast chromatographic separating column is a 1360 fast chromatographic separation column
composed of pre-treatment column and primary separating column. It is required to give clear
indication of SK-3Q04 1360 fast chromatographic separating column when placing an order.
(c) Main technical indicators

Fast analysis cycle: component C1-C5>30s
Conventional analysis cycle: component C1-C5>90s
The concentration ratio of methane and ethane is 100:1 (10% methane and 0.1% ethane):
evidently distinguishable.
Detector: double FID (component FID and total hydrocarbon FID)
Chromatographic column: SK1360 series fast chromatographic column
Carrier gas: hydrogen gas
Measurement range of component: 5mol/mol-1106mol/mol (30s analysis cycle) (methane)
30mol/mol-1106mol/mol (90s analysis cycle) (methane)
Measurement range of total hydrocarbon: 20mol/mol-1106mol/mol (methane)
Noise: 1%.FS
Drift: >2%/h.FS (stabilize after startup)
Qualitative and quantitative reproducibility: +/- 2.5%
Working environment of instrument:
Supply voltage: 220V10%
Frequency: 501Hz
Gross power of instrument: >500W
Ambient temperature: 5-35
166
Relatively humidity: 45-85%

A SK-3Q04 hydrogen flame chromatograph has the program of two analysis cycles (namely
different analysis cycles of 30s and 90s), users can select at will according to their needs and for an
instrument, it is required only to press several buttons to change the analysis cycles, meeting different
needs of users. For evaluation on such technical indicators as measurement range of components, the
30s analysis cycle will prevail, while evaluation on 90s analysis cycle should comply with technical
conditions of SY/T5191-93 gas chromatograph logging instrument. For all the indicators listed, analysis
results of 3Q04 chromatographic workstation prevail. The results of recording instrument and integraph
are used as reference.
(d) Instrument system
Analytic system
SK-3Q04 hydrogen flame chromatograph and SK-9G01 sample pre-treatment unit make up a
complete analytic system. In order to ensure the normal operation of instrument, the related purification
system is added when interconnecting the analytic system and the analytic system includes sample pre-
treatment unit and analytic unit. The sample pre-treatment unit acquires samples from mud degasser, the
samples enters the pre-treatment system through the sample pump; besides the purification function of
sample gas, the sample pre-treatment unit also has the function to distribute the sample gas and then the
treated or distributed sample gas enters the analytic unit. The analytic unit includes sampling system,
separating system, detector, flow control system and measurement control system, etc. The block
diagram of analytic system is shown in Figure 5.2-2.
Figure 5.2-2 Block diagram of SK-3Q04 analysis system

Measurement control system
167
SK-3Q04 adopts the intelligent measurement control system controlled by computer and the
system includes power system, furnace temperature control, analytic system, signal control, total
hydrocarbon and component electrometer, TFT display, touch screen and special chromatographic
workstation, etc.SK-3Q04 system is of fool-model operation; it will automatically enter the control
program after users pressing the switch, automatically ignite the flame of total hydrocarbon and
component FID after the system is stable and automatically analyze the samples from degasser.
The measurement range of SK-3Q04 is wide and thus it is required to use special high-precision
regulating unit. This unit is under the control of SK-3Q04 software and it can display the separation
waveform of components on the panel; inheriting the high-resolution tradition of Shenkai Company, the
measurement range can cover all the waveforms of peaks from the minimum detection limit to full
range. The block diagram of measurement control system is shown in Figure 5.2-3.
Figure 5.2-3 Block diagram of measurement control system

Panel and structure of analytic system
The front and rear panels of analytic system of SK-3Q04 hydrogen flame chromatograph are
shown in Figures 5.2-4 and 5.2-5 and the structure of analytic unit system is shown in Figure 5.2-6.
Figure 5.2-4 Front panel of SK-3Q04 analytic unit
168
Figure 5.2-5 Rear panel of SK-3Q04 analytic unit
Air control system

Component FID
Measurement control system

Transformer of power supply
Electrometer Analysis system
Power switch
Panel+TFT
Total hydrocarbon FID
Figure 5.2-6 Schematic diagram of SK-3Q04 analytic unit system
Sk-9G01 sample pre-treatment unit

Features
This instrument is used as the sample pre-treatment unit located before SK-3Q04 hydrogen flame
chromatograph; under the circumstances it is used together with SK-3Q04 hydrogen flame
chromatograph, it has four-way different gas inputs and two-way outputs of gas in different delivery
volumes by switching the two-position six-way valve and four-position five-way valve on the panel of
SK-9G01 sample pre-treatment unit.
Input voltage of sample pump: 220VAC
Relative humidity of environment is less than: 95%
Ambient temperature: 0-40
Indicating range of mud vacuum gauge: 0-0.1MPa.
169
Product overview
Front and rear panels of SG-9G01 sample gas pre-treatment unit are shown in Figures 5.2-7 and
5.2-8.
SK-9G01 sample pre-treatment unit can continuously provide the sample gas to SK-3Q04 hydrogen
flame chromatograph for field analysis of well head gas (natural gas samples taken from mud degasser
in the field using the sample pump in the system), the calibration gas obtained using gas sampling bags
is also used to calibrate SK-3Q04 hydrogen flame chromatograph and standard bottle gas or zero air is
also used to check two chromatographs or correct the zero position. The flow diagram of sample gas
pre-treatment unit is shown in Figure 5.2-9.
SK-9G01 sample pre-treatment unit inputs the sample gas provided by engine degasser through the
sample input port inserted in the rear panel of the sample pre-treatment unit by pipeline using the
sample pump, the two valves on the front panel of sample pre-treatment unit are switched to the
Sample gas position. The input port of sample gas on the rear panel of SK-3Q04 hydrogen flame
chromatograph is connected to the output port 1 of sample gas on the rear panel through the pipeline.
The gas sampling bag can be connected to the injection port on the front panel of SK-9G01 sample
pre-treatment unit, the two-position valve is switched to Correction position and the four-position
valve is switched to Injection position; in this way, the calibration gas is supplied from the output port
1 of sample gas on the rear panel to SK-3Q04 hydrogen flame chromatograph for calibration.
Figure 5.2-7 Schematic diagram of the panel of SK-9G01 sample pre-treatment unit
1 Vacuum gauge; 2-Pressure gauge; 3-Planar switching two-position four-way valve; 4-Planar
switching four-position five-way valve; 5-Injection port.
170
Figure 5.2-8 Schematic diagram of the rear panel of SK-9G01 sample pre-treatment unit
1-Five-core socket; 2-Sample vent 2 (connect to non hydrocarbon); 3-Input port of sample; 4-Sample
vent 1 (connect to hydrogen flame);
5-Input port of zero air; 6-Equalizer regulating valve of sample; 7-Input port of standard gas
Figure 5.2-9 Graph showing gas circuit of SK-9G01 sample pre-treatment unit
The standard input port and zero air input port on the rear panel of SK-9G01 sample pre-treatment
unit can be connected with bottle gas and clean zero air, respectively; the two-position valve on the front
panel is switched to Correction position and the four-position valve is switched to Correction and
Zero air positions, respectively; in this way, the gas can be supplied from the output port 1 of sample
gas on the rear panel to SK-3Q04 hydrogen flame chromatograph for verification and zero correction.
Connection
Sample gas degassed from the degasser, dried and filtered zero air and standard bottle gas
are connected to the sample input port, zero air input port and standard input port on the
rear panel of the instrument using pipes;
171
The output port 1 of sample gas is connected to the input port of sample gas on the rear
panel of SK-3Q04 hydrogen flame chromatograph using pipes;
Five-core control socket of SK-3Q04 is connected to the five-core socket on the rear panel
of instrument using cable conductors.
Method of application
Pressure adjustment
When the two-position and four-position valves are at the Sample gas position, adjust the
equalizer valve on the rear panel to make the indicating value of pressure gauge up to about 0.04MPa.
Gas circuit selection
When the sample gas (gas from engine degasser) is used for analysis, it is required to switch the
two-position and four-position valves to Sample gas position, operate buttons on the panel of
SK-3Q04 hydrogen flame chromatograph to turn on the sample pump and then the indicating
value of pressure gauge on the panel of instrument shall be about 0.04MPa; in this way, the
sample gas is suctioned and at the same time, the sample gas is outputted from output ports 1 and
2 of sample gas.
When the standard sample gas (bottle gas) is used for verification, it is required to switch the two-
position and four-position valves to Correction position, operate buttons on the panel of SK-
3Q04 hydrogen flame chromatograph to shut down the sample pump and open the valve of
standard gas sample bottle, open the pressure reducing valve until the output pressure is 0.1-
0.15MPa, and then the indicating value of sample gas pressure gauge on the panel of instrument
shall be about 0.04MPa; in this way, the standard sample gas can be obtained at output port 1 of
sample gas and no sample gas is outputted at output port 2 of sample gas. Please note that the
sample pump is at the shutdown status.
When zero air is used for zero correction, operate buttons on the panel of SK-3Q04 hydrogen
flame chromatograph to shut down the sample pump and then switch the four-position valve to
Zero air position; if the two-position valve is switched to Correction position, then the
indicating valve of sample gas pressure gauge on the panel of instrument is about 0.04MPa and in
this way, the zero air is obtained at output port 1 of sample gas and no sample gas is outputted at
output port 2 of sample gas; if the two-position valve is switched to Sample gas position, then
the indicating valve of sample gas pressure gauge on the panel of instrument is about 0.04MPa
and in this way, the zero air is obtained at output ports 1 and 2 of sample gas. Please note that the
sample pump is now turned off.
When the calibration gas (air bag gas) for injection port is used for calibration, it is required to
switch the two-position valve to Correction position and the four-position valve to Injection
position, then the sample gas is connected from the injection port on the front panel; operate
buttons on the panel of SK-3Q04 hydrogen flame chromatograph to turn on the sample pump and
then the indicating value of pressure gauge on the panel of instrument shall be about 0.04MPa; in
this way, the air bag gas is suctioned, the injected sample gas is obtained at output port 1 of
sample gas and no sample gas is outputted at output port 2 of sample gas. Please note that the
sample pump is now turned on.
Operational positions of the instrument to handle statuses of different gas samples such as Gas
degassed from mud, gas sampling bag (injection), zero air and standard sample gas are as
follows.
Table 5.2-1
Injection method Position of two- Position of four- Status of sample Output port Output port
position six-way position five-way pump 1 2
valve valve
Gas degassed Sample gas Sample gas Sample pump is Available Available
from mud turned on.
Gas sampling bag Correction Injection Sample pump is Available Unavailable
(injection) turned on.
172
Zero air Correction/sample gas Zero air Sample pump is Available Unavailable
turned off. /available
Standard gas Correction Correction Sample pump is Available Unavailable
sample turned off.
Failure and Elimination
The vacuum gauge displays a value of certain quantity, indicating sample gas may be
blocked and it is required to check the blockage of sample gas input pipeline.
The displayed value of the pressure gauge is incorrect when using: probably indicating the
sample pump works abnormally and it is required to check whether the hydrogen flame
analyzer powers the sample pump normally; it may indicate the adjusting rod of equalizer
value is loose and it is required to check and re-adjust the pressure; the sample pump
discharge is inadequate and it has exceptional noise and it is required to clean the pump
diaphragm.
The gas sample is input but no gas sample is output: it may indicate gas leakage in the
pipeline, it is required to check leakage and deal with it; it may indicate the two-position
valve (six-way valve) or four-position valve (five-way valve) is not switched to the
designated position and it is required to check and switch it to the designated position.
While using normally, there should be about 600mml/min gas outputting at output port 2 of
sample when the two valves are at the sample gas position, which can be observed on the
rotor flowmeter on the front panel of SK-3R03. If the flow is incorrect, indicating that there
exists gas blockage at output port 2 of sample gas, so the filter element should be replaced
in time.
Notice
When the standard sample gas (bottle gas) is used to calibrate and the zero air is used to
correct, it is required to operate on the panel of SK-3Q04 and shut down the sample pump
of SK-9G01 to avoid damaging the sample pump and prolong its service life.
When the sample gas is injected for calibration using the injection port, please switch the
two valves to sample gas position immediately to avoid damaging the sample gas and
prolong its service life.
To protect the instrument, cup-shaped filter elements are placed in inlet and outlet of some
pipes: adapter of input port of sample gas, adapter of input port of zero air, adapter of input
port of standard gas, adapter of injection port, in the internal gas lock block of instrument
(connect to nylon hose at the output port of sample pump); users shall often replace these
filter elements as appropriate.
When the gas from steel cylinder or other high-pressure gas storage device is used as input
gas, the output pressure of steel cylinder or other high-pressure gas storage device shall be
controlled below 0.4MPa to avoid exceeding the usable range of two-position and four-
position valves which will affect its normal operation of instrument.
Instrument overview
In SK-3Q04 hydrogen flame chromatograph, one flame ionization detector (FID) is connected
to the rotary valve switching system and used to determine the component gas from methane to
pentane; another flame ionization detector is connected to the flow of sample gas taken from
the degasser and directly determines the total quantity of hydrocarbon gas.
Shenkai high-efficiency 1360 series chromatographic analytical column can effectively
separate C1-C5 components in oil and natural gas.
The layout of SK-3Q04 panel (see Figure 5.2-4) is concise: 10.4-inch TFT display with touch
screen, VMS injection port, carrier gas pressure gauge and sample gas pressure gauge. All the
dialogues are conducted through touch keyboard display. Large-screen TFT display can display
much information such as analysis status, control process, FID operation and chromatographic
data processing, qualitative and quantitative process, analysis results and chromatograph charts
etc.
173
SK-3Q04 system consists of hydrogen flame chromatograph unit and SK-9G01 sample gas pre-
treatment unit and therefore, the input and output connections on the rear panel and inlets of
sample gas, air and hydrogen gas etc shall be purified strictly and it is required to provide pure
and dried gas sources for SK-3Q04 system. All the outlets of gas circuit (blowback emptying,
excessive sample gas blow-off, blowback blow-off of hydrogen gas flow and so on ) leads
outdoors through the overall outlet of comprehensive logging instrument (or geologic logging
instrument, truck-mounted gas instrument. At the same time, the input connection of electric
circuit and single input & output connected to the outsides are available on the rear panel. The
flow diagram of sample gas pre-treatment unit is shown in Figure 5.2-9.Gas circuit control
graph of analytic unit (Figure 5.2-10).
Figure 5.2-10 Gas circuit control graph of SK-3Q04 analytic unit
(e) Installation
Each SK-3Q04 hydrogen flame chromatograph shall be connected according to requirements in
Figure 5.2-11.
In the schematic diagram, the dash-line connection is for electric circuit (including signal line and
AC 220V power supply) and the solid-line connection is for pipeline. In the schematic diagram, the
printer is optional (HP3820 printer is used in the figure) and due to rapid upgrading of printers, the
optional printers is required only to comply with PLC3 protocol of HP Company for DOS printing.
174
Figure 5.2-11 Schematic diagram for connection of 3Q04 chromatograph and SK-9G01 pre-treatment
unit
Notice for connecting:

No gas leak occurs to the pipeline system, it is required to check leakage using neutral cleanser
when there is evidence indicating gas leakage and the hydrogen gas and sample are discharged
outside the instrument room.
The signal lines shall be connected firmly.
(f) Operation
Startup operation
Start up air compressor, air pressure 300KPa and hydrogen generator H 2 300KPa (Air and H2
equalizer valves on the rear panel of SK-3Q04 have been adjusted when leaving factor, users
cannot adjust at will. Otherwise it may give rise to abnormal operation of system.).The output
gas pressure: the pressure of hydrogen gas is 100KPa and the air pressure is 100Kpa.
Connect pipelines of filtered pure air, hydrogen gas and sample gas.
Connect the power supply of instrument (shown in the dash box for front panel of SK-3Q04
analytic unit in Figure 5.2-4), SK-3Q04 measurement control system enters the control status (
Attention: startup to enter the display window takes about 2-3 minutes), the instrument
runs according to fixed procedures and enters the main control window, as shown in Figure 5.2-
175
12.The Status monitoring in the bottom of TFT screen is used to check whether parameters
such as temperature of chromatographic column, pressure of sample gas and flow rate of carrier
gas etc conform to expected values or not (press Status key of touch screen twice using the
operation pen). To avoid misoperation, (press Keylock key to unlock), related keys of touch
screen works only after pressing them twice, as shown in Figure 5.2-13.
Status
Two FID flame ignition display
Figure 5.2-12 Main control window of SK-3Q04 display
176
Figure 5.2-13 Display window of SK-3Q04 control status

In the control Status window in Figure 5.2-13, much information is displayed, including
temperature (temperature of chromatographic column), flow rate, pressure, component signal, total
hydrocarbon signal, analysis time of component, lag depth, switching status, status of sample pump,
operating modes of component FID and total hydrocarbon FID.
After the preheating time is reached, that is to say, after the constant temperature and status
displayed of chromatographic column are normal, the measurement control program will automatically
conduct the ignition operation on the assessor. After finishing the ignition operation, select the required
operating mode of instrument and the display is selected as daily observation window (such as window
in Figure 5.2-12).In the normal operation, it is no need to browse the TFT screen if unnecessary.
All analytic parameters (including pressure, temperature, flow rate and retention time, etc.) of gas
circuit in this instrument are saved on the computer as default values, including data of electrometer and
quantitative calibration, etc. SK-3Q04 series has two programs with different analysis cycles of 30s
and 90s and in consequence, default values of their internal control parameter are different. Dont
make a mistake.
The flow rate, blowback time and as well as standard curve of sample have been adjusted when the
instrument leaves factory and it is unnecessary for users to adjust them to avoid other troubles.
When the instrument is out of order due to misoperation in the field, the fastest recovery method is
to restore all the electric parameters to original values (default values) and then adjust the flow rate to
original value. In this way, the instrument will generally run normal. If additional operation is needed, it
is no more than to slightly adjust the retention time of component and the sensitivity of electrometer.
At the normal operating mode, GC setting values are.
Table 2.1-4
Item Pressure of Temperature of Flow rate of carrier gas
sample gas chromatographic column
Display normal value 40Kpa 80 75ml/min
Display status Normal/abnormal Constant temperature Normal/abnormal
/overheat/ normal
temperature/ preheat
*The above values will be displayed in the Status window. It is necessary only for operators to
177
observe them and unnecessary to change the default values frequently to avoid not finding the correct
operation parameters.
After heating less than one hour, as shown in Figure 5.2-13, the temperature of
chromatographic column is up to 80 and when reaching the set values of carrier gas and air,
the measurement program will automatically ignite FID assessor and continuously ignite until
total hydrocarbon FID and component FID are ignited (in Figure 5.2-12, the fire display in the
lower right changes from blue X to red fire).If operators forget to turn on air compressor or
hydrogen generator, it is impossible to ignite two FIDs; if operators come across the
situations above, they shall open the switch of air compressor or hydrogen generator
immediately. A few minutes after FID is ignited, the system switching valve of SK-3Q04
switches automatically (if the temperature of chromatographic column is not up to 80 or
there exist deviations in temperature control, the switching valve cant switch). Turn on the
sample pump, then the total hydrocarbon and component begin to pursue baseline in working
mode of awaiting orders (as shown in Figure 5.2-14).
If the instrument is in the adjustment mode, it is unnecessary to ignite two FIDs; in order to
protect the instrument, it is unnecessary to continuously emit ignition signal to two FIDs and it
is necessary only to close Heating or Automatic switching in the lower left of main menu
in Figure 6-1.
Sample gas enters the system and the chromatographic graph shown in Figure 5.2-12 appears
(total hydrocarbon gradually rises and the signal of hydrocarbon components appear).
Press View key in the bottom of Figure 5.2-14 (first press Keylock for unlocking), then
windows as shown in Figure 5.2-15 and Figure 2.2-16 will appear.
If it is required to conduct concentration calibration, conventional setting and advanced setting,
etc. on analytic results, continuously press the triangular key shown in Figure 5.2-14 twice.
Then the system enters the windows as shown in Figure 5.2-18, 5.2-19 and 5.2-20.
If the instrument is in the repair or waiting status, the ten-way switching valve of flow cannot
switch and it is necessary to press the TOGGLE key in the bottom of Figure 5.2-17 and here
the switching value switches manually.
In the instrument system, totally same functional keys are available in different windows, for
example, Toggle, Heat, Pump, Ignite, View and so on. Their definitions are same.
Attention: when the system is of constant temperature, the prompt alarm of Carrier flow rate has
not reached rated value (Figure 5.2-17) will be given if the flow rate and pressure of carrier gas are not
up to their set values. You can press OK to close the window and it will not pop up; if your press
Cancel, the display will appear again in the next cycle. If data not uploaded in the database are up to
80% of its capacity, the prompt of The database is up to 80% will be given. Press OK to close. If
you dont want to display this prompt window any more, you can select to transfer the latest file.
178
Concentration calibration,
check baseline, advanced
setting and conventional
setting etc
Figure 5.2-14 Schematic diagram for waiting status of SK-3Q04
179
Figure 5.2-15 View I of total hydrocarbon (green line) and component curves
Figure 5.2-16 View II of total hydrocarbon (green line) and component curves
180
Figure 5.2-17 Alarm prompt window
Definitions of touch keys in operating windows.

Table 2.2-1
No. Key Definition Remarks
Shutdown It is required to close
The system enters the shutdown program (shutdown of
1 hydrogen gas and air at
instrument).
the same time.
2 Heat Heat the chromatographic column with a furnace.
3 Pump Manual switch of sample pump
Ignite Manual ignition of component FID and total hydrocarbon
4
FID
5 Status System control status, collection and output signal display
View Enter the switching between display in the form of
6 Switch according to needs
recording instrument and detection report etc.
Enter operations such as Advanced, Setup, Calibrate
7
BasAdj, DataTran and so on.
8 NEW Display the last analytic result
9 PREV Take the previous group of analytic results in the database
NEXT Take the subsequent group of analytic results in the
10
database
SELE Look for a group of analytic results saved in the database at
11
random
SEQU Display information such as total hydrocarbon at 60min, Display information of
12
baseline, C1-C5 information and so on 180min in 90s
Print Press this key to print the current information (it is required
13 to first turn on the power supply of printer and then press
Print command, otherwise, error code will appear)
14 TOGGLE Manual switch
BASCOM Compensate identified fluctuation baseline (after checking
15
baseline)
16 Save Press Save key to automatically save analytic data
Low* The system automatically
Applicable to analysis of sample with the concentration switches when analyzing
17
less than 2% Please dont select
manually
Setup Many settings of real-time chromatographic graph, analysis
18
cycle, display map
Advanced Settings of analytic conditions and detailed regularity of
19
C1-C5 peaks
20 Calibrate Calibrate signals in response to different concentrations
BasAdj Correct (identify) fluctuated baselines Check baseline for high-
21
sensitivity operation
DataTran Transfer data saved to upper-level computer (through RS- Keep communication with
22
232 serial port) upper-level computer
23 KeyLock Other keys cant be operated before this key is pressed.
*Inject samples of high concentration for the first time (the concentration of any component in the
sample is more than 2%), the first peak is flat head, which is caused by conversion of high and low
concentrations of electrometer and this is normal phenomenon.
Definitions related to display contents:
Table 2.2-2
No. Display Definition Remarks
1 Blowback The system enters the blowback status Blue
2 Analysis The system enters the analysis status Green
3 Constant The constant temperature oven of chromatographic column Green
temperature enters the constant temperature status.
181
4 Overheat Heat the constant temperature oven of chromatographic Red (stop heating)
column to make it over 5 of the set temperature.
5 Normal Stop heating the constant temperature oven of Blue
temperature chromatographic column
6 Preheat The constant temperature oven of chromatographic column is Green
in the course of heating.
7 Fire FID flame has been ignited. Red
8 Fire FID extinguished Blue
9 Lag depth Well depth data (lag depth) transmitted by CMS Numerical value
Figure 5.2-18 Calibration window of components or total hydrocarbon

Calibrating method
As shown in Figure 5.2-18, input peak areas of different concentrations in the table, select the
compound correctly, activate the data column when it is required to modify data, then input
data in Figure 5.2-18 and press "OK to finish it. The figure includes correction of C 1-C5
component and total hydrocarbon data. It shall be noticed that input data are accurately
corresponding to C1-C5 components and total hydrocarbon (For Select in Figure 5.2-18, press
to decrease or to increase).
Attention:
Press OK key after inputting corrected data of concentration. This system has two analysis cycles
of 30s and 90s. The corrected data of total hydrocarbon are universally used in two analysis cycles.
But however, those of components at 30s and 90s cannot be used universally and it is required to
re-correct using standard gas samples where it is accurately quantitative. Input corrected data of
total hydrocarbon and components in the two cycles.
First determine the type of gas to select Concentration/voltage data and the sequence to
Select for data correction determined by the instrument is: methane, ethane, propane,
182
isobutane, normal butane, isopentane, normal pentane and total hydrocarbon (eight options in
total), input according to this sequence or input at random; if you input at random, you can
press Sort to automatically sort from low concentration to high concentration. Press and
Select will sort gas in reverse direction, namely: total hydrocarbon, normal pentane,
isopentane, normal butane, isobutane, propane, ethane and methane. In the bottom of the
window shown in Figure 5.2-18 are 0-9, , digitals, BK key (backspace key) and default key.
It is required to press OK after finishing the data input, showing data has been confirmed by
the measurement control computer. Calibration data can be printed by a printer.
Example of total hydrocarbon calibration: as shown in Figure 5.2-18, first Select, press the
triangular key to select total hydrocarbon (TH); in the blank boxes, the left are concentration
and the right are peak areas (in fact, they are voltage values for total hydrocarbon), you can
select analytic results of eight concentrations in the blank boxes. First press DEFAULT key in
Figure 5.2-18 and here data will appear in the blank boxes. Now inject samples and you can
obtain analytic results of total hydrocarbon at concentrations of 0.01%, 0.1%, 1%, 5%, 10%,
50% and 100%, respectively; if the analytic results of total hydrocarbon are values in ppm, you
can multiply them by 100 to convert to mv (for example, obtained analytic result at the
concentration of 10% is 10%, multiply 100 and you obtain 1000mv); by analog, you can obtain
analytic results (converted) at different concentrations and input them in the table in Figure 5.2-
18.After finishing the data input, input data above are valid only after pressing OK key.
Example for component calibration: the calibration method of component is the same as that of
total hydrocarbon but conversion is not required, you can directly input peak areas of different
concentrations in the table in Figure 5.2-18, but it shall be noticed specially that components
include C1-C5 different compounds and it is required to determine Select at corresponding
compound (pressing the triangular key to select different compounds) before inputting data.
After inputting data of a compound, input data are valid only after pressing OK key.
Analytic calibration shall be tested with standard samples. Prepare 10 standard samples of
0.01%, 0.02%, 0.5%, 1%, 2%, 5%, 10%, 20%, 50% and 100%.At least, 4 standard samples of
0.1%, 1%, 10% and 100% shall be prepared and other 6 samples are prepared manually using
these 4 standard samples. For manual preparation, only one preparation is allowed. To ensure
data accuracy, keep dilution factor within 5:1.Testing with standard samples improves data
reliability and also enhances the authority of data interpretation. The test begins with the
concentration of 0.01%, increase the concentration in turns and obtain results of C1 at different
concentrations at the workstation. After finishing sample injection, this group of data is input to
3Q04 for chromatographic calibration (shown in the correction window of components or total
hydrocarbon in Figure 5.2-18), and the input method is as follows: You can directly input
concentration (%) and peak area value (mvs). There are at most 8 groups of data for the voltage
value corresponding to the input concentration. The software will automatically calculate
correlation coefficient, intercept and slop of this channel.
Attention: when conducting the linear test, care must be taken to prevent cross contamination
between samples of different concentrations. It shall be noticed that samples of low concentrations
are injected first and then samples of high concentrations are injected gradually; in the case a
sample of high concentration such as 100% is injected by mistake, it is required to flush using pure
air or set the program of fast chromatograph at automatic injection status and drive the residual
sample gas out after customized switching for several times. Switch until no signal appears for
inject of empty switch (the signal value is within the detection limit).
183
Figure 5.2-19 Window of conventional setting

Conventional setting
Figure 5.2-19 is the window of conventional setting (such as component and total hydrocarbon
curves are displayed at the same time and component data can be displayed alone).Display many
contents such as curve, name of components, autosave, automatic switching and analytic threshold etc
in the chromatographic graph; if some action or data are not required, continuously press twice on the
small grid before this item until in the small grid before this item disappears and finally press OK
key. For the component algorithm, the Peak_Valley Method is selected and in the digital display, what
you select will be displayed. The switch of SK-3Q04 between short analysis cycle of 30s and long
analysis cycle of 90s is the selected switch in this window. If it is necessary to switch cycle, it is
required to input the password in the password column (first press CE key to clear the password, then
input and press Ok key once after finishing input and then switch the cycle). If you want to run in the
long analysis cycle of 90s, it is necessary only to continuously press twice on the blank dot before the
long analysis cycle of 90s and then press OK key twice. Where, Blow(s) has been adjusted when
leaving factory and it is unnecessary for users to adjust (including blowback time of short and long
analysis cycles).For evaluation on such technical indicators as measurement range of components, the
30s analysis cycle will prevail, while evaluation on 90s analysis cycle should comply with technical
conditions of SY/T5191-93 gas chromatograph logging instrument.
184
Figure 5.2-20 Window of advanced setting

Advanced setting
Figure 5.2-20 lists items that can be set in the advanced setting, such as temperature, flow rate,
pressure, retention time, half peak width and so on, and press OK key twice after modifying.
Attention:
If you want to modify parameters in this window, it is required to input the password in the password
column (first press CE key to clear the password, then input and press OK key once after
finishing input 135791 and then you can modify the parameters).For example, to modify rated
pressure of sample gas, first input the password, then select the pressure textbox, press CE key to
clear the textbox, input corresponding pressure value and press OK.
Query data
If you want to search for data saved in the course of operating, you can press SELE key and the
window shown in Figure 5.2-21 appears. Press the left and right triangular keys of time and the left and
right triangular keys of step in the popped up small window to quickly find out a time interval and you
can obtain the analysis report at that time; restore to the original status if you press Cancel.
SK-3Q04 system has the function of SEQU display, as shown in the window in Figure 5.2-22;
for the analysis cycle of 30s, data of 60 minutes can be displayed continuously and nine-channel data of
total hydrocarbon, baseline, C1, C2, C3, IC4, C4, IC5 and C5 in 60 minutes are displayed by time intervals;
for the analysis cycle of 90s in the same window, data of 180 minutes can be displayed continuously and
nine-channel data of total hydrocarbon, baseline, C1, C2, C3, IC4, C4, IC5 and C5 in 180 minutes are
displayed by time intervals; nine-channel data displayed are switched by selecting the corresponding
keys (C1 and C2keys and so on in the upper of the window in Figure 5.2-22), press DETAIL to
switch from the window in Figure 5.2-12 to rapid separation graph with the horizontal coordinate of 30s
or 60s.
185
Figure 5.2-21 Schematic diagram of SELE window
Figure 5.2-22 Schematic diagram of SEQU window
186
Data saving and data upload

In the course of normal logging, the loads of chromatograph and collection instrument are
relatively heavy and data upload may give rise to failure of data transmission due to large data quantity;
therefore, it is suggested to upload data files in the course of non-normal logging. It is required to close
logging software to reduce the load of system.
SK-3Q04 hydrogen flame chromatograph is able to automatically save data, as shown in
Figures 5.2-12, 5.2-14 and 5.2-21. When Save key pops up, data are not saved. If you press
Save key twice, it will be pressed down and then analytic information will be saved
automatically. For the short analysis cycle (30s), automatically saved data of one hour are saved
as a data file and for the long analysis cycle (90s), those of three hour are saved as a data file; a
data file includes data of total hydrocarbon and C 1-C5 components that are analyzed for 120
times.
When SK-3Q04 runs continuously in the short analysis cycle (30s), log gas survey data and
chromatographic graphs of two months can be saved. When SK-3Q04 runs continuously in the
long analysis cycle (90s), log gas survey data and chromatographic graphs of six months can be
saved. When data in the electronic disk are full, if data are not cleaned from the electronic disk,
the analysis is conducted again after overflow and new data will overwrite the first data (initial
data).Press DataTran twice as shown in Figures 5.2-18, 5.2-19 and 5.2-20 to enter the data
save as, namely, data upload as shown in Figure 5.2-23.
Figure 5.2-23 Window of DataTran
Data printing
3Q04 hydrogen flame chromatograph has the printing function attached to the instrument and it
can slowly and quickly print chromatographic graphs, time-sequence of chromatographic information of
60min/180min (total hydrocarbon, baseline, C 1, C2, C3, iC4, nC4, iC5 and nC5) and calibration curves of
total hydrocarbon/ component in real time. The data printing function is an auxiliary function.
Generally, data are saved in the database in the electronic disk and printed data are presented only as
another presentation in the field.
187
Adjust baseline
When 3Q04 hydrogen flame chromatograph runs at high sensitivity (low concentration), the
instrument has baseline correction function, namely, BasAdj appears in the panel; when press
BasAdj, the analysis cycle is corrected automatically five times by the baseline, BasAdj pops up
automatically. Press BASCOM key and the high-sensitivity analysis is conducted in the next cycle.
It shall be noticed after correction in the analysis cycle of 90s, it is required to correct again when
switching to the analysis cycle of 30s, and that is to say, two sets of correction programs are available
for analysis cycles of 30s and 90s.The analysis cycle of 90s is selected in the course of logging and that
of 30s is selected when approaching to target strata.
VMS operation
Automatic VMS operation
When conducting the VMS operation, shut down the sample pump, insert the injection needle
into VMS port on the panel of 3Q04 analytic system, then take samples from thermovacuum
degasser using an injector (the sample quantity is 2-5ml), homogenously and slowly push the
injector in the VMS port (through the injection needle) 5s before the instrument switches from the
blowback status to analysis status. When the program enters the analysis status, draw out the
injector and finish the automatic VMS operation.
Manual VMS operation
When conducting the manual VMS operation, shut down the sample pump; in the
conventional setting in Figure 5.2-19, close the automatic switching to make the analytic system at
the manual switching status, insert the injection needle into VMS port on the panel of 3Q04
analytic system, then take samples from thermovacuum degasser using an injector (the sample
quantity is 2-5ml), homogenously and slowly push the injector in the VMS port (through the
injection needle) when the instrument is in the blowback status, press TOGGLE key in Figures
5.2-17, 5.2-19 and 5.2-20 to switch to the analysis status, draw out the injector and finish the
manual VMS operation.
Attention: please shut down the sample pump when conducting the VMS operation, and draw
out the injection needle (make the VMS port sealed) when VMS operation is not conducted.
(g) Maintenance
Gas source
SK-3Q04 hydrogen flame chromatograph is an exact analytic instrument used in the petroleum
exploration field and it should be maintained with care when it is used.SK-3Q04 chromatograph
contacts many external gas sources, which is the emphasis of routine maintenance.
SK-3Q04 hydrogen flame chromatograph mainly includes two facilities to supply hydrogen gas
and compressed air. In addition, the sample gas taken from the petroleum exploration field is also
available for the chromatograph. All the gas sources should be dried and filtered strictly. Hydrogen gas
and compressed air are dried using allochroic silicagel and for the compressed air, it is required to add a
segment of active carbon to the allochroic silicagel to absorb the oil in the compressed air. The filter of
below 10u should be added before entering the chromatograph to prevent dust from entering the
chromatograph.
After pumped out from the degasser, the sample gas first enters the anti-blocking device to prevent
mud from pumping out. Secondly, the anhydrous calcium chloride is used as the drying agent. After it
enters the logging instrument through the pipeline, a segment of drying agent of anhydrous calcium
chloride is added. The filter of below 10u should be added before entering the chromatograph to prevent
dust from entering the chromatograph. The allochroic silicagel is absorptive and cannot be used as the
drying agent.
It is required to check the drying agent every day and often replace it. If the water vapor enters the
chromatograph, it will give rise to instability of instrument and shorten its service life.
188
Attention: if the gas circuit is choked by small particles such as dust, organic impurity and
mechanical impurity etc, it will give rise to abnormal operation of instrument and inaccurate
measurement and even shorten the service life of instrument. In order to prevent this phenomenon, it is
required to place a filter in the front end of gas circuit; much impurity is contained in the sample gas and
therefore, the filter shall be replaced regularly.
The filter of sample gas in the chromatograph is replaced every three months. However, it is
required to check the filter and replace it immediately if the sensitivities of components and total
hydrocarbon become lower at the same time. A filter should be placed before the gas inlet joint. For
replacement, refer to Figure 5.2-24.
Sample gas, hydrogen gas and air inlet filters
Joint
O-shaped ring
Spring
Cup-shaped filter
to be replaced
M4 screw
Spring washier
Figure 5.2-24 Schematic diagram of replacing the filter in SK-3Q04

Replacement method: shut down the instrument (or shut down the pump), open the cover of
machine case, find the sample gas joint of filter, first loosen M4 screws in the external right side of
machine (unscrew to 8-10mm and loosen the gas lock joint with a wrench), then take down all the gas
pipelines, take out the gas lock (unscrew all the M4 screws), take down the joint at the end where the
filter is mounted, take out the spring and filter and take a new cup-shaped filter and put in it (notice the
cup mouth is downward), then press the spring, screw up the joint (please replace the O-shaped ring on
the joint), assemble all the gas pipelines according to the original status and finally fix it in the original
position, turn on the instrument (turn on the sample pump), apply the leakage detection liquid on the
joints in the airing status and close the cover of machine case after you are sure there is no gas leakage.
The filtering ball outside the chromatograph should be replaced in time when it becomes black.
Daily inspection and field calibration
The chromatograph adopts direct switchover sample injection using 1% mixed sample gas cylinder
in each shift. When analyzing, the main window of control displayed in the instrument shown in Figure
5.2-12 is used to inspect the noise and drift indicators of chromatograph, components are calculated by
peak areas and the result of total hydrocarbon is displayed until flat top (peak height).
On TFT display screen, retention times of compounds and lag well depth are displayed at the same
time (the lag well depth is transmitted from the upper-level computer).The chromatograph is calibrated
with pure methane for each trip. Take a plastic bag of pure methane gas sample (about 1000ml), analyze
189
it by manual switch. It is unnecessary to adjust if the full-scale voltage is in the range of 9.0-10.5V; if
beyond the range, adjust the corresponding full-scale potentiometer of SK-3Q04 to make the full-scale
voltage of potentiometer in the rang of 9.0.0-10.1V.+3Q04 quantified by peak area and the peak height
is used as reference.
Power supply
SK-3Q04 hydrogen flame chromatograph uses a very simple power supply, but the dynamic
analysis range of SK-3Q04 hydrogen flame chromatograph is very large, up to over five decimal
numbers and more or less, the noise caused by power supply will affect the analytic precision. We get
accustomed to recording original data using a linear recorder but however, the linear recorder is prone to
interference of power supply noise and burr or white noise is superposed in the output curve, affecting
the quality of data. For this reason, the chromatograph system is expected to work under clean and
stable power supply conditions. At ordinary times, we purify the utility power and add a voltage
regulating device if required. The frequency of utility power is generally stable line frequency and thus
the effect of frequency is not considered.
Table 2.2-3
Switching power
supply SPS A100-122 12V /1A, +12V /2A, 5V/6A
R type transformer 50V /0.2A, +17.2V /1.5A, 4V/ 5A, +17.2V /0.22A, 11V/0.2A
When it is used in the petroleum exploration field, the effect of diesel generator cannot be
ignored.SK-3Q04 chromatograph system should be powered by UPS. The frequency of power supply
should be kept at 501Hz as much as possible. Over large frequency deviation will give rise to evident
decrease in efficiency and increase in heat of equipment such as generator and transformer etc and it
will directly cause system failures. It should be connected to ground to avoid over large current of
ground line.
Integraph/ recorder
SK-3Q04 reserves interfaces of integraph / recorder for users but it has certain maintenance
requirements for operators.
The analysis speed of SK-3Q4 is fast, so the recorder should use relatively fast chart speed and
operators shall check pen and paper every day. The recorder paper exposed to moisture is prone to
deviating or stopping. Rapid peak output is more likely to cause this phenomenon and frequent check is
required.
For fast analysis, the integraph / recorder will output many records every day and it is required to
appropriately deal with the paper outlet to prevent paper from filing up.
TFT liquid crystal screen and touch screen
Notices for using TFT liquid crystal screen and touch screen
Protect the surface of touch screen. The touch screen is a relatively delicate display and
operation control system. When maintaining and using, users shall operate by operation pen of
touch screen or clean hand and it is forbidden to touch the surface of touch screen by dirty
hand; therefore, dont contaminate or damage the display screen or touch screen when
maintaining them.
Notices for operating
TFT liquid crystal screen is assembled through elaborate design, so please dont assemble and
unassembled the screen at will. TFT liquid crystal screen and touch screen shall be maintained
by professional technicians or under their directions.
Dont assemble and unassembled the external metal frame to avoid damaging TFT liquid
crystal screen and touch screen.
Dont scuff the touch screen using hard or cute parts.
Notices for maintenance of TFT liquid crystal screen
190
The connection between the liquid crystal screen and the main board shall be bound firmly
and socket connector shall be inserted accurately to their designated positions, otherwise over-
current and over-voltage may be caused, damaging the elements of the liquid crystal screen.
The working temperature of liquid crystal screen is 0-45 and its saving temperature is -20-
+60 and it cannot be used or stored beyond the limit storage temperature; if the temperature
is lower than the crystallization temperature, the liquid crystal will crystallize and the
directional layer is damaged, making parts failed; if the temperature is too high, the liquid
crystal will become isotropic, losing the liquid crystal phase and accordingly, it loses the
function of liquid crystal parts.
When the backlight is on but no character is displayed on the liquid crystal screen, dont pull
and plug connectors with power on , otherwise the liquid crystal screen will be burnt out. It is
forbidden to squeeze the liquid crystal screen by acute objects to avoid scuffing the surface of
screen or other dispensable damages. If the signal connecting wire of liquid crystal screen and
adapter on the bias plate of inverter break off, they shall be connected correctly according to
the wiring diagram. The output voltage of liquid crystal screen cannot exceed 22V, otherwise
the liquid crystal screen may be burnt out.
(h) Failure diagnosis and elimination
Failure to ignite automatically
The measurement control system is not set at automatic switch. Please refer to conventional
setting window and activate Automatic switch.
The temperature doesnt reach the preset value (in warm-up status).After the temperature
reaches its preset value, the measurement control system will give an ignition command.
Failure to ignite
Hydrogen generator is not opened.
Air compressor is not opened.
Remove the lid of upper cover of assessor and observe whether the ignition wire is burnt red or
not in the case of automatic igniting. If the ignition wire is burnt red, the measurement control
system is in normal operation.
If the ignition wire is not burnt red, measure whether 4V ignition voltage is available or not at
the two wire-connecting terminals.
Voltage available:
Is the ignition wire broken?
Whether the ignition wire contacts poorly with wire-connecting posts.
No voltage
The ignition wire is broken.
The connector lug is loose.
The ignition fuse is broken.
Air inspection
Measure the flow rate of combustion-supporting air and it should be in the range of 700-800ml/min
(total hydrocarbon FID and component FID); if the flow rate is too large, it is difficult to ignite and the
reason is that the hydrogen gas will be diluted due to too large flow rate of air, giving rise to abnormal
ignition of FID.
Flow rate of hydrogen gas
What is directly related to FID ignition is flow rate of hydrogen gas. In the control status display
window, the flow rate of hydrogen gas (carrier gas) is digitally displayed directly and the displayed
value is over 60ml/min (the analysis cycle of 30s), the flow rate is small and thus it cannot ignite
normally.
In the normal status, the instrument has been adjusted when leaving factory and it is unnecessary
for uses to adjust (related parameters such as temperature and flow rate etc).
191
Switching extinguishment
Check whether the flow rate is 80ml/min (about) or not in two statuses: analysis and sampling
statues. If one flow rate is especially small, it will result in switch extinguishment. Please check
whether gas leakage may occur in one of two statuses.
The switching value is of no force when switching and it takes long time, giving rise to
instantaneous interruption of hydrogen gas in the assessor when switching.
The air leaks in a large area and hydrogen gas cannot burn sufficiently, giving rise to
extinguishment due to lack of oxygen when switching suddenly. It is required to monitor the
pressure gauge on the panel of instrument.
Extinguish occasionally without special reasons
Occasional extinguishment is generally caused by unstable flow rate of hydrogen gas or
combustion-supporting air in the pipeline and it is seldom found. If this phenomenon appears, it is
required to find out where gas leaks or is blocked in the analysis process. Sometimes, it is very difficult
to find out slight amount of gas leakage or blockage and you can step up the supply gas pressure and
comparison with the flow rate parameter in the original record of instrument will help to find out where
gas leaks or is blocked.
Working gas pressure is unstable.
Whether the supply gas source complies with the range of pressure. The equalizer valve of
chromatograph itself works normally only in a certain range of gas pressure and each level of
hydrogen gas circuit can work only in the pressure difference of over 0.07-0.1MPa and for air,
the pressure difference is over 0.15MPa.Over high supply gas pressure not only makes the
equalizer valve out of effect but also damages the equalizer valve.
The sample gas is pressurized by the sample pump itself, which, in combination with the
attenuation of long pipeline, making the post-pump pressure not very high. If serious gas
leakage occurs in the post-pump sample gas pipeline, the post-pump pressure will drop and it
cannot meet the requirements of pressure difference for equalizer valve. The sample jump is
used for a long time and the rubber diaphragm will deposit dust or age, which also gives rise to
drop in post-pump pressure.
Over large attenuation of long sample pipeline and agglomeration of calcium chloride due to
influence with damp in the drying cylinder may aggravate the load of sample pump, giving rise
to insufficient post-pump pressure and finally, the pressure of sample gas is unstable. When the
mud degasser and sample gas etc are blocked, the vacuum gauge of SK-9G01 will indicate the
pressure (the vacuum gauge will not indicate under normal conditions) and it is required to
check the sample gas pipeline for blockage.
The baseline has burr or its noise is large.
The supply gas source is not dried well and the working gas is too damp. It is required to
replace the drying agent.
FID nozzle is dirty, giving rise to unstable flame and jump spark. It is required to clean the
nozzle.
The assessor itself is dirty and the insulation resistance drops. It is required to clean it.
Whether the condensation water is found or not in FID. Electric leakage causes decrease in
insulation of FID, results in baseline noise and burr.
The ion wire is poor (insulation drop or electrical leakage gives rise to unstable signal). It is
required to replace the ion wire.
Much dust is accumulated inside the electrometer or electrometer is exposed to serious
moisture. It is required to clean and dry it in the shade.
The flow rate of hydrogen gas is over large at the nozzle and the temperature of assessor is over
high. It is required to adjust the gas flow and check the reason for over large flow rate.
Baseline drift is large.
192
The chromatographic column and pipeline system are contaminated by heavy components. In
this case, it is generally found after the matters such as gasoline, diesel oil and drill fluid
cement etc are absorbed and the chromatograph can separate component peaks after a long time
by manually injecting sample. It is very difficult to deal with this case. The general practice is
to enhance blowback and stop injecting sample. Contamination will become less serious or
even disappear after long-time blowback. If there is no sufficient materials and time, you
cannot disassemble pipelines and clean them.
The working gas source is too damp and it will accompany with burr or noise and it will
become normal automatically a while later after replacing the drying agent.
The assessor itself is dirty and the insulation resistance drops. Cleaning is required.
The blow-off gas of chromatograph is not discharged outdoors and the content of organic
matter in the air increases.
Much dust is accumulated inside the electrometer or it is exposed to serious moisture. It is
required to clean and dry it in the shade.
The chip of electrometer is poor and it should be replaced.
Components are separated poorly.
The flow velocity of carrier gas is over large, giving rise to decrease in the efficiency of
chromatographic column and it is required to reduce the flow velocity.
The temperature of column oven is over high and it is required to find out reasons for over
temperature.
The peak output is too fast and it occurs often together with over large flow velocity of carrier
gas.
The chromatographic column is contaminated and should be replaced.
The chromatographic column fails due to use for a long time and it should be replaced with a
new chromatographic column.
Air leaks in the pipeline and it is required to repair the gas circuit.
Whether the gas circuit leaks or is blocked. It is required to repair the gas circuit.
When the above methods are not effective, it is recommended to buy another set of Shenkai
1360 series fast chromatographic column.
The peak output time of component is too long.
The flow velocity of carrier gas is too small and it is required to re-adjust and increase the flow
velocity.
The temperature of column oven is too low and it is required to find out reasons for temperature
loss.
The supply gas pressure of carrier gas is too small.
The carrier gas is blocked or leaks and it is required to repair the gas circuit.
The calibrated peak output drops down.
The sample gas lock is blocked or a slight amount of gas leaks at the joints. It is required to
repair the total hydrocarbon gas circuit. The working flow rate of total hydrocarbon is very
small and slight amount of gas leakage will give rise to decrease in the sensitivity.(Total
hydrocarbon only)
The over large or small flow rate of carrier gas will cause drop-down of peak output. When the
flow rate of carrier gas is over large, the sensitivity of assessor will decrease; when the flow
rate of carrier gas is over small, the peak output will widen and the peak height will also
decrease.
There are mistakes in manual preparation and sampling methods and samples of the same
concentration can be analyzed by several persons and then compared for verification.
The pressure-reducing valve of sample gas cylinder is poor and no gas taken for a long time
will also give rise to dilution of sample gas inside the pressure-reducing value. It will become
193
normal after taking gas for several times.

The output of electrometer is saturated.
The internal diameter of nozzle of assessor is too small and it should be replaced with a
standard nozzle (its internal diameter is 0.6mmm).
The insulation drop-down of input part of assessor or ion wire (high resistance exposed to
moisture) will also cause the output saturation. But in this case, the saturated electrometer will
not output peak.
The chromatograph doesnt output peak after injecting sample.
Whether the valve position is correct when injecting sample.
Gas leaks in the injection port or gas leaks in the multi-way valve of sample gas pretreatment
unit.
The injection valve is not rotated to the designated position.
The nozzle has no polarizing voltage of +200V to the cabinet.
Whether the ion wire is normal or not (short circuit).
The electrometer is damaged.
Whether the working gas source is normal or not.
The screen cannot display normally.
The indicator of master switch of power supply is on but FTF liquid crystal display is off.
Failures of embedded PC system; it cannot drive normally.
The connection of screen contacts poorly.
Gas circuit operates abnormally or fails to operate.
The drive gas cylinder fails to operate and it may be due to air leakage. Check it for any
leakage and maintain the normal working gas pressure of gas cylinder.
The peripheral connection contacts poorly. Check and weld again.
Poor mechanic coupling of drive plate with main board gives rise to virtual connection and it is
required to modify the relative position.
The execution unit such as magnet value etc is damaged. The case is rare and it should be
replaced if this occurs.
Ten-way switching valve works abnormally.
The long-working valves have exceeded their service lives and gas channeling occur to valve
cores. They shall be replaced with valves of the same specification.
The long-working system is blocked slightly, represented by the fact that C 1-C5 components
cannot be output fully in the cycles of 30s or 90s.In addition, the sensitivity also decreases.
It is generally found where the gas circuit is not smooth or gas leaks. The carrier gas leakage is
evident, which can be displayed in the status display window in Figure 12.
Failure to communicate with serial port of computer.
Check the serial-port connection with computer and try again by replacing with a new cable.
The serial port of computer or chromatograph is damaged and the serial plate should be
replaced.
The instructions of main board are wrong and the main board should be replaced.
Whether the computer is set by mistake.
Failure to communicate with parallel port of printer
Check the parallel-port connection with computer and try again by replacing with a new cable.
The parallel port of computer or chromatograph is damaged and the parallel plate should be
replaced.
Shutdown or frequent startup of system
Whether the DC power supply for main board is stable and normal or not. Replace with a new
power supply if required.
Whether feed cable of power supply and connecting pieces contact poorly.
194
The chromatograph often powers off.

Check whether there is virtual connection in the feed cable, drag wire board and distribution
line.
When powered by UPS, it is required to check whether the power supply of UPS is stable and
there is overload.
The temperature is out of control.
The temperature-controlled platinum resistance is short circuited or open circuited and it shall
be replaced.
The heating wire is short circuited or leaks electricity and it should be replaced or reconnected.
The line recorder cannot output.
The conditioning plate of recorder is damaged and it should be replaced.
The connection of conditioning plate is poor or damaged and it should be replaced.
Operations of SK-3H02 infrared analyzer

Application field
SK-3H02 infrared analyzer can measure concentrations of CO, CO 2, CH4, C3H8, HC and NH3 etc.
With good long-term stability and selectivity, the instrument is widely applied to fields such as
petrochemical industry, metallurgy and cement manufacturing, environment protection and agricultural
science and so on. It can also be used in laboratory analysis.
Operating principle
Sk-3H02 infrared analyzer belongs to nondispersive infrared analyzer. Its optical system consists
of light source, gas chamber and detector. The electrical system consists of preamplifier, main amplifier
and temperature control and power supply.
Its operating principle: light source component modulates continuous infrared radiation to
intermittent radiation, which passes through analysis edge and reference edge of gas chamber
alternatively (single pile separating semi-gas chamber. Reference edge seals high purity nitrogen not
absorbing infrared rays) and finally is absorbed by detector. The detector used by this instrument is
semiconductor infrared detector. When high purity nitrogen is fed to analysis lab, the infrared radiation
energy absorbed by detector from reference edge and analysis edge alternatively is equal, and the output
signal of the instrument is zero. When component to be measured is fed to analysis lab, the reference
signal received by the detector doesnt change, but the analysis signal will change due to the absorption
of component to be measured in analysis lab, and the output signal proportional to the component to be
measured will be generated. The slight electrical signal becomes direct current signal proportional to the
concentration of the component to be measured after impedance conversion, frequency selection, phase
sensitive detection and filtering through preamplifier and main amplifier.
Main technical data
Measuring range: the minimum measuring range is 0-100ppm and the maximum measuring range
is 0-100% (determined according to requirements)
Repeatability: 1% (resolution: normal amount: 0.01% v/v, trace amount: 1ppm)
Stability: zero point drift 2%F.S/24h
Measuring range drift 2%F.S/24h
Linearity error: 2%F.S.
Response time of the instrument: T9015s
Flow of the measured gas: 0.5-3L/min
Ambient temperature: 0-4; relative humidity: 90%
Power supply: 220V10%, 500.5Hz, 150W
Measurement output: 0-20mA; 0-10mA; 4-20mA; 1-5V (provided according to user requirements.
It is not affected by load within the maximum load 600. Concentration is displayed in the form
of pointer or number).
195
Instrument structure
The embedded SH-3H02 infrared analyzer consists of chassis, optical components (light source,
gas chamber and detector), dust filter, flowmeter and electronic components.
There are power switch, indicator for temperature control, pointer or digital concentration display
meter head, dust filter, pump switch, zero point and span potentiometers and gas flowmeter on the front
panel of the instrument (alarm function and II-level measuring range are provided according to needs).
During circuit design of instrument, zero point potentiometer and span potentiometer are
independent, so is their adjustment. When correcting, please adjust zero point before adjusting span.
There are inlet and outlet for gas to be measured, power socket with filter, fuse and the output
signal plug on the rear panel of the instrument.
Instrument installation
Before taking out the instrument from the packing box, it is necessary to check whether the
packing box has been damaged or not. It should be careful in transportation.
Open the box to check the appearance for any damage.
The placing site and installation of the instrument
When the instrument is used for flow analysis, SK-3H02 infrared analyzer should be installed close
to sampling point as much as possible to reduce lag time. Or large flow flow-distributing sampling is
adopted to reduce lag time resulting from over-long sampling pipe. The instrument should be installed
in dry and clean environment with good ventilation. Ambient temperature is 0-40 and relatively
humidity is less than 90%, avoiding direct sunshine.
The highest ambient temperature for using instrument is 45 . When the temperature is more than
40, the specified measuring accuracy and error limit cant be ensured. At the same time, working in
high-temperature condition for a long time will shorten the service life and maintenance cycle of the
instrument, as the service life of instrument components will reduce with the increasing of the
temperature. When choosing the installation site of the instrument, avoid strong vibration that may have
influences on the instrument.
This instrument belongs to non explosion-proof electric equipment. Therefore, use in places prone
to explosion is prohibited. To install it using dial plate, place the box body in the opening hole of the
dial plate and use a mounting plate to lift it. Fix the instrument with four M6 screws.
Gas circuit connection
Inlet and outlet nozzles of gas to be measured are available on the real panel of the instrument.
Generally, flexible hose can be used for connecting. Please tell us your special requirements for
connecting with the sampling system, if any, while you placing order.
Gas pre-treatment
To prevent the sample chamber of the analyzer from pollution and obtain correct analysis results, it
is very important to correctly select sampling points and gas pre-treatment devices. Sampling point
should be selected in places where gas concentration is representative.
The measured gas will pass through the filter for removing the dust in it. After the measured gas
with high-humidity and temperature higher than room temperature passes through analysis lab,
condensation will occur, which can be eliminated by adopting the method of heating the filter and
sample pipe, or adding a steam separator to separate the water from the sample. To separate small
waterdrop, it is necessary to use gas condenser-compression condenser or semiconductor thermopile
condenser. For viscous components such as coal tar etc. in the measured gas, it is required to select or
design special devices to separate the viscous components. For some special non measured components
with strong disturbance in sample, it is required to use proper chemical method to remove them.
Gas circuit installation
The measured gas pipe connected to the analyzer should be short as much as possible to reduce lag
time. If the lag time of measuring results is too long, large flow bypass sampling should be used. The
installation of the sampling pipe should be such that no condensed water is accumulated in the pipe. If
196
condensation occurs, a separator or a gas condenser should be installed at the lowest point of the pipe
before the analyzer. If the ambient temperature of the sampling pipe is below zero degree, the sampling
pipe should be heated to prevent water accumulation and freezing from blocking the pipe. In a word,
uses are advised to select pre-treatment device according to actual conditions.
Power supply connection
One end of power cable of the instrument is CEE standard plug and the other end 5A/250V
triangular plug with safe grounding contact. Connect phase, neutral and ground lines of power supply
correctly.
Measuring and recording instrument ground connecting
The measurement output of the instrument is 0-20mA (or 4-20mA) direct current, and the
maximum load is 600. When voltage output is needed, it is required to select correct reducing
resistance to connect to the instrument.(The instrument can be connected before leaving factory
according to user requirements).
Instrument startup
Check heating control
After power on of the instrument, the temperature control indicator on the front panel should light
up, indicating that the instrument is heating. After about 15 minutes, the temperature control indicator
begins to flash. After two or three hours, the optical system of the instrument can reach constant
temperature. Zero point and span correcting as well as measurement can be performed. The constant
temperature point of the analyzer has been adjusted to 47 before leaving factory, and the users cant
change the constant temperature point at will. If the constant temperature of the instrument needs to be
measured, a contact thermometer can be used to measure the temperature of the detector socket.
The over-temperature protection measures of the instrument: when the temperature exceeds 53
and even reaches 70 due to malfunction of the temperature control. The bimetal switch will cut off to
power off the heating board and stop heating. Generally, after the instrument is preheated for two or
three hours, zero point and span correcting as well as measurement can be performed.
Adjust zero point
Close the pump switch, and feed zero point gas (high-purity nitrogen gas) to the instrument, then
adjust the flow to 0.5L/min.If the zero point gas is released from the steel cylinder with pressure
reducing valve, use the pressure reducing valve to adjust the pressure at the instrument inlet to make the
flow reach 0.5L/min.The maximum pressure at the instrument inlet is 20KPa.The constant instruments
apart from measuring carbon dioxide can use air for zero setting, namely, turn on the pump switch to
extract the pure air to the instrument through air nozzle. After one or two minutes, use a small clock
screwdriver to adjust the zero point adjusting potentiometer on the front panel to make indicating value
of the instrument at zero point.
Adjust span
Use standard gas to adjust instrument sensitivity.
After finish zero point adjusting of the instrument, turn off the pump switch, and feed standard gas
of known concentration (70-100% of the measuring range) to the instrument. The flow rate is 0.5-
1L/min. Use a small clock screwdriver to adjust the span adjusting potentiometer on the front panel to
make indicating value of the instrument the same as the concentration of the standard gas fed to the
instrument. After span adjusting, measurement can be performed. When measurement is not performed
or in the course of positive pressure sampling, the pump switch should be off.
Notice
On the circuit board of temperature control and power supply inside the instrument, potentiometers
for temperature control adjusting, light source pressure adjusting, phase adjusting, linearization
adjusting and meter head synchronous adjusting have been adjusted before leaving factory, it is
unnecessary for users to adjust. If adjustment is needed in the course of using, it should be done when
the measuring conditions are satisfied. Otherwise, no adjustment should be done to avoid adjustment
197
disorder, making the instrument unable to operate normally or burn out the instrument.
Use and maintenance
In order to ensure the normal operation of instrument, users should regularly check and maintain
the instrument and its sampling system. Instrument maintenance mainly includes checking the safety
filter and dust filter.
For the dust filter on the front panel of instrument, its filter paper is white originally. If it changes
into dark blue or black, it should be replaced; for the safety filter connected to the gas inlet and
outlet in the internal gas circuit of instrument, if it is contaminated, it shall be cleaned with proper
cleaning agent according to the type of contaminants.
If the light source motor produces noise in the course of instrument operation, it is required to
replace the motor. It is forbidden to add oil to shaft and bearing of motor.
Maintenance of sampling system: according to different types of samples treated by sampling
system, it is required to regularly check sampling units such as various filters, cooler and steam
separator of the sampling system, clean or replace them in time to ensure the sampling system to
work normally.
It is required to check and correct the span of instrument once or twice a month. It is required to
check and correct the zero point of instrument once or twice a week.
During the maintenance period each year, it is required to check leakproofness of the internal gas
circuit and sampling system in the instrument.
Trouble shooting
No indication
No. Causes Elimination method
1 The fuse of power supply is broken. Replace 1.5A fuse.
No gas flow (no sample gas goes through the
2 Check the gas circuit and filter of instrument.
flow meter).
Open the upper cover and insulation cover of the
The cable plugs of light source component or instrument and check whether the cable plugs of
3
preamplifier unit are not connected well. light source component and preamplifier
component are inserted firmly.
Open the upper cover and insulation cover of the
The irradiation wire of light source is burnt out
4 instrument and check whether the irradiation wire
or welding spots fall off.
is burnt out and welding spots fall off.
The indication is unstable.
Check whether the gas circuit of sampling gas is
1 The flow rate of gas is unstable. blocked and the control of flow rate is out of
operation.
2 Mechanic vibration Improve the environment.
The motor of light source component is out of
3 Replace optical components.
operation.
A 200W AC regulated power supply should be
4 Interference of power supply.
equipped if necessary.
5 Failures of preamplifier or detector. Send to factory for repair.
The indication is incorrect.
Gas leakage in the gas circuit. Check the gas circuit of the instrument and filter
1
on the front panel.
2 Maladjustment of zero point or sensitivity. Correct the zero point and sensitivity.
Gas to be measured contaminates optical Unscrew and lift the black cover of optical
3 components. component, blow wash it with high-purity
nitrogen gas and then fasten it.
The indicator of temperature control is off. Check whether the indicator is damaged or not
4 and measure whether 220V voltage is available
at two leading wires of heat plate.
The indicator of temperature control is on. The temperature control circuit is out of control
5
and it is sent to the factory for repair.
6 Gas leakage in the gas chamber. Blow wash the reference edge of gas chamber
with high-purity nitrogen gas and it is required
198
to replace the gas chamber if the indication of

instrument changes.
The standard gas is inaccurate. Analyze the standard gas again or check the
7
standard gas with other instrument
The zero point cannot be adjusted.
1 No response Check according to no indication
No response to the adjustment of zero point Check the preamplifier and main amplifier
2
potentiometer. circuit.
The sensitivity cannot be adjusted.

1 The concentration of standard gas is incorrect. Replace the standard gas.
Dry the standard gas or remove water in the
2 The standard gas is damp.
standard gas.
3 The gas circuit is not tight. Check for leakage.
The concentration of background gas varies
4 Go to the factory for consultation.
largely.
5 The gas chamber is contaminated. Send to factory for repair.
6 Optical components are not tight. Send to factory for repair.
Transportation and storage
Avoid dropping and tumbling the instrument during transportation. Avoid rainfall, exposure to
sunlight and fierce shock.
Store the instrument indoors. The room temperature is 0-45 and the humidity 90%.
When the instrument is not to be used for a long time, store it in a cool and dry place, and start
it once half a year.
199
Chapter VI Startup Operation and Test of the Complete

Machine
After finishing the field installation and connection, operate according to the following steps:
First step: heavy-current part
Power on the main power
First, close the main power switch in the mud logging unit. According to user
requirements, the main power switch may be installed at the inlet of the logging unit
container, or in the cabinet at the back of the logging unit.
Figure 6-1 Appearance of main power switch of the mud logging unit
After the main power switch is closed, three-phase AC power from well site will enter
the logging unit. The three-phase power supply from well site first enters the primary side of
the flameproof transformer and the secondary side outputs three-phase 380VAC to flameproof
control box. The indicator of three-phase power supply at the top of cabinet in the logging unit
lights up (Figure 6-2), and users are required to adjust the universal selection switch on the
panel of the flameproof control box to position 1 (auto) or 2 (manual). The default position is
0 (stop) when the logging unit leaves factory. If position 1 (auto) is selected, the positive
pressure explosion-proof system will be started. If position 2 (manual) is selected, the positive
pressure explosion-proof detection will be ignored and the three-phase 380VAC will be sent to
the distribution equipment (Figure 6-3).For the logging unit is still at the stage of debugging,
users are suggested to select position 2 (manual) temporarily. For the operation method of
activating the positive pressure explosion-proof system, refer to the operation flow of the
positive pressure explosion-proof system.
Figure 6-2 Indicator of three-phase power at the top of cabinet in SK-CMS (if not all of the
three indicator are on, open phase is likely for the external three-phase power).
200
Figure 6-3 Schematic diagram of the panel of SK-CMS mud logging unit flameproof control
box
Distribution equipment operation

After three-phase 380VAC is sent to the distribution equipment, open the cabinet door of
the distribution equipment. Ensure all the air switches in the distribution equipment are in off
position. Close the left-top C65N (4-link air switch) +ViGi C65 (leakage protector). The
indicator of three-phase power on the front panel of the distribution equipment is on (if not all
of the three indicator are on, open phase is likely for the external three-phase power). The
panel and internal circuit of the mud logging unit distribution equipment are shown in Figure
6-4.
Three-phase power detection

Now users are required to check whether the displayed values of the frequency meter and
voltmeter on the front panel are normal or not. Usually, the frequency of 50Hz and voltage of
360~400V are normal. The three-phase voltage among phases AB, AC, and BC of live line
can be detected by rotating the universal change-over switch under the voltmeter.
Warning
Open-phase power supply is not allowed. Both over high and over low frequency and voltage
will have bad influences on the steady operation of the electrical equipment, and even cause
permanent damage to equipment. If the input power supply from well site can't meet the
requirement, users should consider increasing the distribution protection devices.
201
Degasser C65N (air switch)
C65N (air switch) + ViGi C65 (leakage protector)

Current meter Frequency Voltmeter
meter
Universal change- Universal change-

over switch of over switch of
current meter voltmeter Thermal relay of over-current
and open-phase of degasser
Indicating lamp of three-phase power
Power startup button Degasser startup button
Power stop button Degasser stop button

15-way load C65N (air switch)
Degasser manual/automatic selective switch
Figure 6-4 Panel and internal circuit of SK-CMS mud logging unit distribution equipment
Leakage protector test

Press the test button on the top left corner of VIGi C65 leakage protector for 1~2s. If
the leakage protector can drive C65N (4-link air switch) to trip off, it indicates that the
leakage protector is normal (Figure 6-5).
Test button of leakage protector
Figure 6-5 Linkage of leakage protector and C65N (4-link air switch)
Load power supply

Close the Illumination C65N air switch below the distribution equipment and the
fluorescent lamp of logging unit lights up. Press Power on button (green) on the panel of the
distribution equipment, the main alternating current contactor in distribution equipment will
close. Turn on the 15-way load C65N air switch at the bottom inside the distribution
equipment in sequence to supply power for each load.
Switch on the degasser C65N (3-link air switch) on the top right corner of the
202
distribution equipment, switch the selection switch Degasser manual/auto on the panel of
the distribution equipment to Manual and press Degasser on button (green) on the panel
of the distribution equipment, the engine degasser will begin to run. Check whether the
degasser runs well and is fixed firmly. And there should be no relatively great vibration.
Thermal relay test

The thermal relay in the distribution equipment is connected in three-phase power supply
circuit of the degasser, playing a role of over-current and open-phase protection. When the
degasser runs normally, press Test button on the left side of the thermal relay for several
seconds (the specific time length corresponds to the knob at the top of D-Time. D-Time
represents delaying the action time and is 0 by default. Users are not suggested to alter the
parameter without authorization). The alternating current contactor in the power supply circuit
of the degasser should trip off and the degasser alarm on the panel of the distribution
equipment can buzz and flash normally. Press Reset button on the right side of the thermal
relay, the alarm will stop alarming. Press Degasser on button (green), the engine degasser
can begin to run again. After finishing the above-mentioned test, it shows that the thermal
relay can protect the degasser circuit and can be reset normally (Figure 6-5).
Test button of test function Reset button
Figure 6-6 Schematic diagram of the functional keys of the thermal relay
Attention:
The thermal relay cant reset itself automatically after each action. Only by pressing the
Reset key, can the alarm be disabled. Otherwise, the degasser cant be started again.
Operation test of other loads

Start the load marked on the 15-way load C65N air switch in sequence and check
whether each load can operate normally.15-way loads include: air-conditioner 1, air-
conditioner 2, socket 1, socket 2, hydrogen generator, ventilator, heater band, air compressor,
refrigerator, instrument cabinet fan, backup, UPS1, UPS2, illumination and heater unit.
Load balance checking

After starting all the loads in the logging unit, check the reading of the current meter on
the panel of the distribution equipment. The current magnitude of phases A, B and C of live
line can be observed through rotating the universal change-over switch below the current
meter. Check whether the distribution of three-phase live line load is balanced.
Attention:
Unbalanced load distribution can easily cause the neutral point of three-phase power to
203
migrate and make null line live. We have performed accurate calculation on the load equipped
in the logging unit before it leaving factory and distributed it to three-phase live line
balancedly.
Second step: start UPS:

Insert the cable plug of battery in the battery chassis into the socket of battery connector
in UPS main chassis.
Turn on the air switch of battery to ON (on the rear panel of UPS);
Turn on the external power.
Press RUN (run button) on the front panel once and it can run normally.
Instruments in the equipment cabinet and equipment of computer system are powered by two
UPS; after starting UPS, turn on power switches of various instruments, computers, printers and so on,
then the mud logging unit normally enters the power-on ready working status.
Third step: start the air compressor and hydrogen generator
Begin to supply chromatograph with compressed air and hydrogen. The air compressor and
hydrogen generator needs time to supply compressed air and generate hydrogen. Observe whether the
pressure displayed on mechanical pressure gage on SK-3Q04 meets technical requirements or not. If
not, adjust pressure equalizer valves of component hydrogen gas and air on the back panel of instrument
until it meets requirements.
Fourth step: turn on the power switch of SK-3Q04 hydrogen flame chromatograph and SK-3H02
infrared analyzer.
Fifth step: calibrate SK-3Q04 hydrogen flame chromatograph and infrared analyzer.
Sixth step: start the computer and enter CMS software operation. For details, refer to Software Manual
of SK-CMS Mud Logging Unit.
Geologic Evaluation Instruments

Chapter I SK-2T03 Carbonate Analyzer
XXV Operating principle
The carbonate analyzer is a geologic analytic instrument and it mainly analyzes the content of
204
carbonate in the clastic debris, providing favorable evident of naming of clastic debris.
Its principle: use the container of rated volume as the reaction tank, add 1g debris powder required to
be analyzed and 5ml chlorhydric acid (its concentration is 20%), seal the container to let the debris
powder sufficiently react with the chlorhydric acid. The pressure sensor converts the pressure produced
by CO2 generated from the reaction to the electric signal and then it is converted to 4~20mA current
signal of two-wire system through the transmitter. Then SK-9N11 analog quantity input isolation barrier
is used to conduct various operations of converting the analog quantity to digital quantity and after
passing through the electric isolation barrier at the input and output ends, it is transmitted to the host
computer of system through the CAN node bus and analyzed and processed by the computer.
System computer
Pressure sensor embedded 9N11 node CAN bus
in the reaction tank
CAN communication
Figure 1-1 Composition and signal flow chart of carbonate analyzer system
XXVI Main technical indicators

Normal working voltage: 24V
Analytic precision of sample: 1%
XXVII Introduction to components of the instrument

SK-2T03 carbonate analyzer consists of three parts: reaction tank (Figure 1-2, Figure 1-3), 9N11
two-wire A node and computer.

Pressure sensor
Air vent
Slide
valve
Upper cover of
reaction tank

Cylinder of reaction tank
205
Figure 1-2 Profile of reaction tank
Air discharge rubber hose Pressure sensor
Upper cover
Handle of slide valve
Slide valve
Cylinder bottom
Cylinder Cone-shaped trough
Waist-shaped trough
Figure 1-3 Sectional drawing of reaction tank
XXVIII Use and operation of reaction tank

Operation of adding the sample
Weigh 1g rock sample with a balance and crush it down.
Screw off the lower cylinder of reaction tank.
Put the rock sample into the waist-shaped trough at the cylinder bottom of reaction
tank (Figure 1-4);
Add powdery
rock sample
here
Add 5ml chlorhydric

acid with the diluted
concentration of 20%
here
Figure 1-4 Vertical view of cylinder of reaction tank
Note: powdery rock sample is put into the waist-shaped trough and no powder is sprinkled
into the cone-shaped trough to avoid affecting the analytic precision.
Take an injector, suck up 5ml chlorhydric acid with the diluted concentration of 20%,
inject it into the cone-shaped trough of reaction tank and no chlorhydric acid drops the
206
sample to avoid affecting the analytic precision due to reaction with partial sample.
Screw up the upper cover of reaction tank until O shaped gasket is compacted and
sealed (Figure 1-5);
When screwing up the upper cover, it is required to keep the cylinder horizontal
and balanced to prevent the rock sample from reacting with chlorhydric acid
before the instrument doesnt start to analyze.
When placing the cover, it is required to keep the slide valve of reaction tank in B
position; namely, the air pressure in the tank is balanced with the external pressure.
Push the slide valve to A position (Figure 1-6); (Air vent is between o-shaped rings)
Connect signal wires of sensor
Figure 1-5 Screw up the upper cover of reaction tank

Just in such A status, it
is allowed to separate
the internal chamber
from the air vent.
Figure 1-6 Push the slide valve of reaction tank to A position
Note:
The clastic debris shall be weighed accurately and the chlorhydric acid shall be measured
accurately.
The reaction tank shall be cleaned after the reaction each time and no remnant is left.
The sample shall be reacted thoroughly.
If it is required to conduct the next operation after finishing an analysis, the reaction tank must be
washed.
B. Operation steps to wash the reaction tank:
Take down signal wires of sensor
Push the slide valve to B position ;
Take down the upper cover of reaction tank;
Conduct the next operation after washing with water.
207
For the purpose of your

health, please drive the
residual gas outdoors.
In B position, drive the

residual gas out the
chamber and it is
convenient for you to
take down the upper
cover.
Figure 1-7 Schematic diagram of washing the reaction tank

XXIX Use and operation of software
In the main window of CMS real-time setting program, click on tool in the menu and select
carbonate (as shown in Figure 1-8), open an analysis window of carbonate content as follows
(Figure 1-9):
Figure 1-8 Real-time setting for selecting carbonate window
208
Figure 1-9 Analysis window of carbonate

Please note that this option is a window designed specially for CAN bus carbonate analyzer (SK-
2T03).In CAN bus acquisition system, the carbonate analyzer is used as a special sensor node on CAN
bus and it consists only of carbonate reaction tank, pressure sensor and its node. Therefore, its pressure
sensor is calibrated through the data calibration function in the data acquisition program and however, its
operation method is basically the same as that of traditional carbonate analyzer.
Before analyzing the sample, firstly input sample number, sampling depth, sampling interval
and lithology, select the corresponding sample type (debris, core, wall core and standard sample) in
the pull-down menu of sample type and however, analysis time is automatically given by the
program. When you are ready to mix the sample and chlorhydric acid in the reaction tank to make the
react, click on start button in the lower of window (Figure 1-9), start up the analysis process and at the
same time, plot a curve of time vs carbonate percentage in the plot area in the middle of window.
Users can click on stop button according to the actual reaction time of sample to stop the analysis
process at any time, or automatically stop the analysis process when the analysis time is up to 6min.Once
the analysis is terminated, the program will automatically analyze and determine the maximum content
of carbonate, content of calcium carbonate and content of calcium magnesium carbonate and
display analytic results in the corresponding boxes, respectively. If you doubt the analytic results, you
can also edit them manually. After the whole analysis process is complete, click on save button and
209
analytic data and analysis results of this sample are saved in analytic data table of carbonate and
analytic result table of carbonate, respectively, and users can recall the analytic data any time: input
the well depth of played-back sample in the input box of sampling well depth and then click on call
button. If required, click on print button to output the carbonate analysis report (as shown in Figure 1-
10).
Click on this button to print the

carbonate analysis report.
Figure 1-10 Print the carbonate analysis report
XXX Maintenance
It is forbidden to invert the reaction tank in the course of operation to prevent chlorhydric
acid from enters the sensor to damage the sensor.
If the instrument is not used for a long time, please clean the reaction tank.
The instrument should be stored in the place where the temperature is approximate and is
dry to avoid elements from damaging when it is not used.
When transported, it should be wrapped to avoid damaging the instrument due to
vibration.
XXXI Data interpretation

Sample analysis type: the instrument can measure the content of CaCO 3 (calcareous) and
MgCa(CO3)2 (dolomitic) respectively. Curves obtained from the analysis of several different rock
samples are as shown in the Figure 1-11.
Curve A: lime stone. The curve part in transition to horizontal after rapid pressure increase
records the content of CaCO3.
Curve B: Dololime stone. The pressure rapidly rises to 28%, which means that CaCO 3 reaction
occurs first. then the curve begins to bend. The curve in part B represents that
MgCa(CO3)2 reaction occurs very slowly. The measured differential value 19% is the
210
content of dolomite.
Curve C: dolomite. The reaction gradually occurs. Finally the content is 79% when the pressure
is stable.
Curve D: Dolomite with .The reaction immediately occurs, but slowly rises and stabilizes on
68%.
Figure 1-11 Analysis curves of several different rock samples

Curve A: It becomes horizontal after rapid pressure increase and represents the scale line when the
content of CaCO3 is about 28% while the content of other main components (unknown lithology
components) are 72%. The lithology of this part depends on field visual observation on samples. For
example, if 72% of the rock is mudstone, the rock should be named lime mudstone according to the
principle of lithology naming. If 72% of the rock is sandstone, it should be named lime sandstone.
Curve B: 28% of the rock is CaCO 3. Curve B finally falls on the 47% scale line. The part of 47%-
28%=19%, with gentle increase, is the content of MgCa(CO 3)2. The remained 53% are the unreacted
(unknown) rock components. The lithology of this part depends on field visual observation on samples.
For example, dololime mudstone (or dololime sandstone).
Curves C and D: Their interpretations are basically similar to the above. Curves C and D rise
slowly because their main components are dolomite, at 79% and 68% respectively. If the minor
components are identified as mudstone or sandstone or others through visual observation, it can be
named argillaceous dolomite or sandy dolomite.
Type E: All other curves are defined Type E. In this case, lithology is to be defined according to
CaCO3 content by the operator.
Therefore, the lithology naming of rock sample carbonate analysis result is mainly based on the
analysis result and the unreacted lithology combined with field observation to confirm the main
lithology and minor lithology, finally name the lithology.
211
Chapter SK-2N01G Mudstone Density Meter

XXXII Principle
The mudstone density meter is an instrument to measure the density of mudstone.
By measuring the density of mudstone, you can know the pressure change of drilled strata and
predict the possible formations with abnormal pressure. The abnormal pore pressure of formations is
extremely dangerous to oil wells and it may cause accidents such as well kick, well blowout, well lost,
shrinkage of borehole diameter, bit freezing and so on. Characteristics of mudstone to produce ultra
high pressure are that the density of mudstone decreases, deviating from normal density trend line of
mudstone. In general, the resistivity and acoustic velocity of formations with abnormal pressure are also
different and as a result, the resistivity log and acoustic log can be used to detect them. But these log
curves can be obtained only after the drilling is complete. Therefore, a method to immediately predict
ultra high pressure formations is required, namely, the method to measure the density of mudstone is
used to predict abnormal pore pressure of formations.
XXXIII Composition and

technical indicators of instrument
Composition of instrument
SK-2N01G type density analyzer of mudstone
consists of:
organic glass cylinder, scale subdivision in the mirror
plane, fixing mirror bracket, stainless steel pole, floater,
damping hammer, zero setting knob and so on.

Measuring range: 1-3g/cm3

The minimum sample weight: 0.05g

Resolution: 0.03 g/cm3
Fig 2-1: Density analyzer of mudstone
XXXIV Operation and use
When measuring, it is required to use pure mudstone, excluding sandstone, limestone and
other rocks.
Carefully select several new mudstone fragments as samples (new debris from the well bottom
shall be angular and small) in the upstream of vibration screen and it shall be noticed that the mudstone
sample cannot be soaked by mud fluid. Carefully blot up the surface of debris using filter paper (dont
heat), measure its density immediately and dont dry the debris using dry oven or heater.
After add several drops of cleaning agent (or use anionic detergent and soap suds, the purpose
is to lubricate the contact between the upper of stainless steel pole and the water surface to measured
parts no air bubble and water bubble so than correct readings can be obtained)to the pure fresh water,
inject into the organic glass tube, the water surface is about 4cm from the top, put the floater in the
water, no air bubbles are available on the submersed; if available, rotate the floater to eliminate them,
when the floater is stable, its top shall be 1cm at least below the water surface (not more than 2cm), then
press the tray downwards until the damping hammer contacts the bottom, here the tray is 1cm at least
above the water surface, otherwise some water shall be removed.
Measuring method

Before measuring, it is required to adjust zero position and accurately adjust using zero
position knob, shown in Figure 2-2(a).

Put the mudstone sample in the tray, after the damping hammer is stable (cannot contact the
bottom of cylinder), read a scale value L1, shown in Figure 2-2(b), then place the mudstone
sample in the tray on the floater in the water, after it is stable, read a new scale value L2,
212
shown in 2-2(c), the density d of mudstone can be calculated by the following formula:
L1
d=
L1 - L2
Note: measure the position of floater using the graduated scale in the mirror, eye ball, needle point
in the tray and imaging of needle point in the mirror shall on a same horizontal plane when measuring,
and then read corresponding value on the scale.
Figure 2-2
XXXV Data Interpretation

When drilling the well interval of mudstone, take mudstone samples by certain interval to measure
the density of mudstone and plot a well depth vs density log of mudstone using density data of
mudstone at different depths (as shown in Figure 2-3).
213
Figure 2-3 Well depth-mudstone density plot
For samples to measure the density of mudstone, take a sample by the interval of 5-20m, then blot
up water using filter water and measure the density of each sample using the density analyzer of
mudstone, plot these values according to well depth on the coordinate grid of well depth vs density log;
it can be seen that the density of mudstone increases as the well depth increases under conditions, for
example, the normal density trend line of mudstone in Figure 2-3; if it deviates from the normal trend
line, the density decreases, indicating it is surpressure. Its starting end is the top (apex) of pressure
transition zone; see point A in Figure 2-3.
Similarly, plot density values of mudstone at different well depths on the density-depth coordinates
of density vs pressure plot, shown in Figure 2-4, forming an approximate density line of mudstone of
points A, B, C and D.
Now calculate the bottom hole pressure at point C (see density vs pressure plot).AB segment is
normal density trend line of mudstone, the abnormal pressure comes across at point B, the density of
mudstone starts to decrease and the trend line offsets to the left.
Draw a vertical line from point C and intersect AB segment at point D, its well depth is
1920m, the corresponding hydrostatic pressure is 192 bar and find the value of this point on
the pressure scale, it is E and connect DE line.
Draw a parallel line DE from point C and intersect the pressure scale at point F, read the
bottom hole pressure and it is 637 bar.
Calculate the pressure gradient, namely, the theoretical value of density of mud to balance the
downhole pressure, the well depth at point C is 3840m and its hydrostatic pressure is 384 bar.
637
= 1.65
384
1.65 theoretical value of density of mud to balance the downhole pressure.
214
Figure 2-4 Density-pressure plot
215
Chapter III SK-2Y01G-I Fluorescence Analyzer

XXXVI Principle
SK-2Y01G-I fluorescence analyzer is one of the most convenient equipments to rapidly analyze
the oiliness of strata. Exposed to the ultraviolet fluorescent light, oil-bearing sand samples or cores will
clearly emit special fluorescence and therefore, we can discriminate whether strata where sand samples
or cores are taken are oil-bearing or not according to the fluorescence detection of sand samples and
cores.
An enhanced product, SK-2Y01G-I fluorescence analyzer inherits the functions and features of
SK-2Y01G fluorescence analyzer and in addition, its ultraviolet source bracket can be taken out and
irradiated directly, its use and operation is easier and the structure of the whole fluorescence analyzer is
compact and its volume is small.
Figure 3-1 Schematic diagram of flow tester

XXXVII Main technical indicators
Power supply: 220V-, 50Hz
Power: 40W
Specs of fluorescent tube: 20W ultraviolet fluorescent tube (two tubes, specially manufactured)
XXXVIII Use and operation

Take a sample (sand sample or core), put in the box, turn on the power supply, conduct the
dry irradiation of fluorescence on the sample or add several drops of chloroform to the sample
and observe whether the fluorescence appears or not and whether the diffused halo is
available on the filter paper.
Soak the quantitative sample in the tube using quantitative organic solutions such as
chloroform, carbon tetrachloride and on. Observe whether the fluorescence appears under the
wet irradiation of fluorescence, compare with standard series of fluorescence prepared in
advance and determine its fluorescence grade.
You can take out the ultraviolet source bracket, conduct dry irradiation or wet irradiation of
fluorescence directly on the sample in the dark place and examine the fluorescence.
216

CMS Hardware en

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

CMS Hardware en

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

CMS Mud Logging Unit

1 1 Overview of CMS Mud Logging Unit

2 2 CMS Positive Pressure Explosion-proof and Heavy

3 3 CAN Field Bus

4 4 Installation and Operation of Instrument

5 5 Operation Guide for Gas Survey

6 Startup Operation and Test of the Complete Machine

, , and are registered trade marks of Shenkai Company.

Shanghai SK Petroleum & Chemical Equipment Corporation Ltd.

Customer service hotline: +86(21)64290467 Fax: +86(21)34030004

CMS data acquisition

Reader and knowledge requirements

Recover and discard

Online services and technical support

Shenkai customer support hotline:

Shanghai (headquarters) Shanghai (Foreign Trade

Wushen County (office)

Hardware Manual of CMS Mud Logging Unit......................................................................1

BUKU PETUNJUK PERANGKAT KERAS CMS

- Input voltase 220V/380V/440V/480V power supply

Mudstone density meter

III Design and Structure of SK-CMS

Attachment: Block diagram of CMS system

CO2 analyzer Real time chromatography

Well logging printing

Quantitative fluorescent Net- Real-time Data printing

Attachment: External and internal diagrammatic drawings of CMS

Chapter II CMS Positive Pressure Explosion-proof and Heavy

IV.2 System control program chart

Figure 2-1 Control program chart of the explosion-proof system

Figure 2-2 Power source chart of the explosion-proof system

Normal operating pressure: 60-200Pa.

Figure 2-3 Schematic diagram of control circuit of explosion-proof box

IV.4 Power source system connection

Selection of three-phase input power source

Figure 2-5 Appearance schematic diagram of flameproof transformer

Power input options:

Figure 2-6 Junction box schematic diagram of flameproof transformer

IV.5 Operation of the positive pressure system

Figure 2-7 Sketch map of airway port-pipe connection of SK-CMS

Activate positive pressure explosion protection

Observe carefully readings of the barometer above the

Change positions of any two

Operating procedures of the positive pressure explosion-proof system:

after smoke is exhausted completely and restart air exchange.

IV.6 Fire damper

Figure 2-11 Sketch map of fire damper

V Power supply and supply control system of mud logging unit

V.2 Flow of branch circuits of power distribution part

V.3 Circuit principle of the control loop

Figure 2-7 Schematic diagram of distribution box circuits

Turn air switch on the rear panel to ON.

VI.5Common trouble diagnosis and elimination

VII Circuit failure diagnosis and elimination of explosion-proof

VII.4 Protector tripping due to electric leakage of distribution box

Chapter III CAN Field Bus

IX Characteristics and functions of SK-9N21/11 CAN bus

X Working environments of SK-9N21/11 CAN bus explosion-

XI Installation steps, methods and precautions of SK-

XII Structure diagram

Null channel, can install isolation node

Inlet and outlet of CAN bus shield cable

SK-9N21 bottom structure